You are on page 1of 367

KINEMETRICS, Inc.

ROCK Series

ROCK Digitizer
User Manual

Document 300715
Revision J
08/04/2014
Warranties, Disclaimers & Trademarks
Copyright 2008-2014 Kinemetrics, Inc.
The trademarks used throughout this manual, registered or not, are: Kinemetrics, Granite, Basalt, Slate,
Marmot, Rock, Rockhound, Q330, Q330HR, and Linux.

This publication is provided "as is" without warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including,
but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, or non-
infringement. Kinemetrics, Inc. and its affiliates assume no responsibility for errors or omissions in this
publication or other documents which are referenced by or linked to this publication.

References to corporations, their services and products, are provided "as is" without warranty of any
kind, either expressed or implied. In no event shall Kinemetrics, Inc. be liable for any special, incidental,
indirect or consequential damages of any kind, or any damages whatsoever, including, without
limitation, those resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether or not advised of the possibility of
damage, and on any theory of liability, arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
this information.

This publication could include technical or other inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are
periodically added to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the
publication.

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be copied, photocopied, reproduced, transmitted,
transcribed, or reduced to any electronic medium or machine-readable form without prior written
consent of Kinemetrics, Inc.

Notice
Kinemetrics Inc. reserves the right to make improvements in the software described in this
documentation at any time and without notice. The information contained here is subject to change
without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Kinemetrics Inc.

The software described in this document is provided as a licensed item, in conjunction with Kinemetrics
equipment. It may not be copied or distributed for use on other than the equipment it was licensed for.

Disclaimer
Kinemetrics Inc. shall have no liability or responsibility to you or any other person or entity with respect
to any liability, loss or damage caused or alleged to be caused directly or indirectly by this
documentation or the software described in it. This includes but is not limited to any interruption of
service, loss of business or anticipatory profits or consequential damages resulting from the use or
operation of such software or computer programs.
Warranty
We warrant each new product manufactured by Kinemetrics for a period of one year from date of
shipment. Defects in material or workmanship found within that period will be replaced or repaired (at
our option) without charge for materials or labor. If Kinemetrics authorizes the return of a product, we
will pay the round trip freight charges to the factory for repair under warranty. If subsequent evaluation
at Kinemetrics establishes that necessary repairs are due to misuse, then the customer must assume all
charges.

Insurance for all shipments, either first sale or repair, are the responsibility of the customer. Kinemetrics
can arrange to have a policy purchased on behalf of the customer for the first sale; however, it is the
responsibility of the customer to notify the carrier immediately of any freight or handling damage.
Kinemetrics will make every effort to assist the customer in filing a claim with the carrier or insurance
company.

If on-site warranty repair or replacement is required, the customer will be charged the then-current field
service rate for portal-to-portal travel time plus actual portal-to-portal travel charges. There is no charge
for on-site warranty repair labor.

Items not manufactured by Kinemetrics but included in systems (e.g. peripherals, options) are
warranted for 90 days from date of shipment.

Items not manufactured by Kinemetrics and not part of a system (e.g. digitizers, printers, analyzers) may
be warranted by the original equipment manufacturer. Kinemetrics will do everything possible to
expedite and coordinate any warranty service from the original manufacturer.

Software not produced by Kinemetrics may carry its own warranty and the customer should sign any
appropriate license agreement(s) and return to software manufacturer. Kinemetrics assumes no
responsibility for such third-party software.

Software and software updates provided by Kinemetrics Inc. for its Strong Motion and Seismological
measurement and recording equipment have a warranty period of one year. This warranty applies to
the standard software package as well as to options or special software provided to the customer. An
update shipped under warranty will be covered by the original systems warranty for the balance of the
one year period.

Warranty claims shall be made on Software Change Request forms (SCRs). Problems reported by filing
an SCR within one year will be corrected free of charge. SCRs filed after the one year period will be billed
at the then-current rates.

The method of correction will be at Kinemetrics Inc.s discretion, in that a correction may be supplied via
a software patch, or by shipping updated software.

Shipment of updated software will sometimes require hardware or configuration changes to the system.
Hardware changes may include, but are not limited to, memory and disk drives. Required hardware or
configuration changes are not included in the cost of a software update, and may represent an
additional cost to the customer.

All software, once delivered, is covered under warranty. Updates fitting the following descriptions would
NOT be considered valid warranty claims, and the software would be billed accordingly:

Updates not prompted by a software problem.


Additional software options requested voluntarily by the customer, such as the addition of
special software.

Kinemetrics, Inc., 222 Vista Avenue, Pasadena, CA 91107 USA


Phone: (626) 795-2220, Fax: (626) 795-0868
E-mail: services@kmi.com Technical Support: support@kmi.com
Website: www.kinemetrics.com

Services available from Kinemetrics


Installation

Field support for on-site installation, supervision and check-out of Kinemetrics products is available from
Kinemetrics. Training for the customers staff is also available, either at Kinemetrics facilities in
Pasadena, or at the customers site. We recommend contracting for installation services along with
instrument procurement.
Maintenance

Periodic field maintenance programs are offered for our products. Current programs include annual
contracts to service data acquisition systems and accelerographs in high-rise buildings, free-field
accelerographs, offshore platform monitoring systems, maintenance at nuclear power plants and
seismic network maintenance.
Recalibration and Repair

Kinemetrics will repair and/or modify many types of electromechanical instruments and systems. All
repair and calibrations are warranted for a period of 90 days for workmanship. European customers may
contact Kinemetrics SA for assistance at:
ZI Le Trsi 6B
CH-1028 Prverenges, Switzerland
E-mail: kmi_sa@bluewin.ch
telephone ++4121 803 2829
fax ++4121 803 2895.
For Faster Service

When returning any product to Kinemetrics please request an RMA number and make reference to this
number in any following correspondence.
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Table of Contents
Warranties, Disclaimers & Trademarks ......................................................................................................... i

Installation ........................................................................................................................................................... iii

Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................................ iii

Recalibration and Repair ...................................................................................................................................... iii

For Faster Service ................................................................................................................................................. iii

Safety .......................................................................................................................................................... xii

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................. 1

System Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 2

What is Rockhound? ................................................................................................................................. 2

Front Panel ................................................................................................................................................ 3

Standard Interfaces ...............................................................................................................................................4

Sensor Interfaces ..................................................................................................................................................7

External Three Channel Sensor Interface .............................................................................................................7

Internal Accelerometer Deck ................................................................................................................................7

External 4th Channel Single Input Sensor Connector ...........................................................................................8

Four Channel Terminal Board (KMI 111915) ........................................................................................................8

Optional Interfaces ...............................................................................................................................................8

Installation & Setup .................................................................................................................................... 10

Operating Environment .......................................................................................................................... 13

Operating Temperatures ....................................................................................................................................13

Operating Humidity ............................................................................................................................................13

Operating Altitude ..............................................................................................................................................14

Unpacking & Inspecting the Unit ............................................................................................................ 14

Requirements for Installation ................................................................................................................. 14

Required Tools ....................................................................................................................................................14

Page i
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Optional Tools .....................................................................................................................................................15

Required Supplies ...............................................................................................................................................15

Required Equipment ...........................................................................................................................................15

Optional Equipment ............................................................................................................................................15

Practice Assembly ................................................................................................................................... 16

Planning your installation ....................................................................................................................... 16

Network Planning ...............................................................................................................................................16

Civil Engineering ..................................................................................................................................................17

Free-Field Installations ........................................................................................................................................17

Structural-Monitoring Installations.....................................................................................................................18

Installing the Digitizer ............................................................................................................................. 18

Mount the Unit ...................................................................................................................................................19

Grounding the Unit .............................................................................................................................................22

Mount the Sensors ..............................................................................................................................................23

Mount the GPS Antenna (when using the internal GPS) ....................................................................................23

Connect the GPS Antenna ...................................................................................................................................24

Mount the Optional External GPS .......................................................................................................................24

Connect the GPS Engine/Antenna ......................................................................................................................25

Configure the Timing Source...............................................................................................................................25

Connect the Ethernet Connection ......................................................................................................................26

Connecting the Optional Communication Interfaces .........................................................................................26

Connecting the Sensors to the Digitizer..............................................................................................................26

Connecting the Optional External Battery ..........................................................................................................41

Connecting the Power Supply .............................................................................................................................42

Connect a laptop or equivalent to the console port ...........................................................................................42

Basic Operation ........................................................................................................................................... 43

Initial Setup ............................................................................................................................................. 43

Network Address ................................................................................................................................................43

Viewing System Information ...............................................................................................................................44


Page ii
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

The Web Interface ..............................................................................................................................................46

Basic Setup .............................................................................................................................................. 46

Sensor Groups .....................................................................................................................................................47

Voltage Ranges ...................................................................................................................................................48

Sensitivity ............................................................................................................................................................50

Basalt Internal Deck Zero Adjustment ................................................................................................................51

Other Channel Parameters .................................................................................................................................53

Physical vs. Virtual Channels ...............................................................................................................................53

State-of-Health Streams .....................................................................................................................................54

Trigger Levels ......................................................................................................................................................55

Voting Options ....................................................................................................................................................56

Other Parameters ...............................................................................................................................................57

Activating Parameter Changes ............................................................................................................................57

Passwords ...........................................................................................................................................................57

Save Parameters .................................................................................................................................................58

Triggered Recording ................................................................................................................................ 58

Pre-Event Time ....................................................................................................................................................58

Post Event Time ..................................................................................................................................................58

Minimum Run Time ............................................................................................................................................59

Channel Triggering ..............................................................................................................................................59

Anti-Alias Filtering ................................................................................................................................... 68

Time Over Ethernet (TOE) ....................................................................................................................... 72

Theory of Operation ...........................................................................................................................................72

Connection ..........................................................................................................................................................73

TCP/IP Primer .......................................................................................................................................... 74

Terminology ........................................................................................................................................................74

Addresses ............................................................................................................................................................75

Some Guidelines .................................................................................................................................................75

Typical Configurations.........................................................................................................................................76
Page iii
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Rock Services.......................................................................................................................................................76

Further ................................................................................................................................................................76

File Management and Retrieval .............................................................................................................. 78

File Viewing ............................................................................................................................................. 80

Waveform Viewing.................................................................................................................................. 82

Online Documentation............................................................................................................................ 84

Remote Connections ............................................................................................................................... 86

Overview of the Web Interface................................................................................................................... 90

Editing Parameters................................................................................................................................ 116

Adding Modules .................................................................................................................................... 120

Removing Modules ............................................................................................................................... 125

Replacing Modules ................................................................................................................................ 129

Web Interface Advanced Features ....................................................................................................... 134

File Viewer................................................................................................................................................. 137

File Viewer Dynamic Operation ............................................................................................................ 141

Rockhound Command Console ................................................................................................................. 143

Batch Mode ........................................................................................................................................... 149

Non-networked Use .................................................................................................................................. 150

Altus Emulation ......................................................................................................................................... 152

Terminal mode ...................................................................................................................................... 153

Batch Mode ........................................................................................................................................... 161

Streaming .............................................................................................................................................. 162

Dial On Event......................................................................................................................................... 162

Modem Only Operation ........................................................................................................................ 163

The TTYMonitor ................................................................................................................................................163

Dialing In ...........................................................................................................................................................166

File Transfer ......................................................................................................................................................166

Parameter Download ........................................................................................................................................167


Page iv
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Editing Parameters with RockTalk ....................................................................................................................167

Parameter Upload .............................................................................................................................................168

Installing Firmware Updates .............................................................................................................................169

FAQs .......................................................................................................................................................... 170

What is dig1? ..................................................................................................................................... 170

Changing trigger levels .......................................................................................................................... 170

Using Different Triggers or Trigger Filters............................................................................................. 171

Adding Channels ................................................................................................................................... 176

Switching Between Layouts .................................................................................................................. 179

Changing Output Data Formats ............................................................................................................ 180

Timed Recording ................................................................................................................................... 185

Network Triggering ............................................................................................................................... 188

Telemetry Options ................................................................................................................................ 189

Advanced Operation ................................................................................................................................. 190

Layout Wizard ....................................................................................................................................... 190

Configuration Options........................................................................................................................... 202

Network Parameters .........................................................................................................................................202

Modem Configuration.......................................................................................................................................202

IO Bits ................................................................................................................................................................203

Point of Contact ................................................................................................................................................205

Keeping Time ....................................................................................................................................................208

Networking and Security....................................................................................................................... 209

Software Maintenance & Service ............................................................................................................. 210

Powering Up the System ....................................................................................................................... 210

Powering Down the System .................................................................................................................. 210

Software Installation ............................................................................................................................. 211

Auto Mount........................................................................................................................................... 212

Removable Media ................................................................................................................................. 212

Page v
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

IP Services ............................................................................................................................................. 213

Network Configuration ......................................................................................................................... 214

Software Watchdog .............................................................................................................................. 217

Default Behavior: ..............................................................................................................................................217

Powerfail Protection: ........................................................................................................................................217

Application Specific Configuration: ...................................................................................................................218

Linux Passwords .................................................................................................................................... 219

File Retrieval ......................................................................................................................................... 220

Saving and Restoring Parameters ......................................................................................................... 221

Software Updates ................................................................................................................................. 224

Log files ................................................................................................................................................. 228

State of Health ...................................................................................................................................... 230

Software Tools .......................................................................................................................................... 235

Web Browser ........................................................................................................................................ 235

Java........................................................................................................................................................ 236

Terminal Program ................................................................................................................................. 236

Telnet Client .......................................................................................................................................... 236

WinSCP .................................................................................................................................................. 237

PuTTY .................................................................................................................................................... 241

FTP Server ............................................................................................................................................. 250

RockTalk ................................................................................................................................................ 256

Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................................ 265

Modem not Communicating ................................................................................................................. 265

Private Networks................................................................................................................................... 265

Interactive File Viewer Doesnt List Any Files ....................................................................................... 265

Web Servers Layout Wizard Doesnt Transmit Files ............................................................................ 265

Internet Explorer 7 and FTP .................................................................................................................. 265

Page vi
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Altus Emulator and SDS ........................................................................................................................ 266

Waveform Viewer Stops Updating ....................................................................................................... 266

FileViewer and Large Files..................................................................................................................... 266

Deleting a Linux directory with lots of files .......................................................................................... 266

Cant delete data files when logged in as admin ............................................................................... 266

IP issues. Firewalls and router blocks ................................................................................................... 267

External Charger ................................................................................................................................... 268

Storage ...................................................................................................................................................... 269

Primary Compact Flash ......................................................................................................................... 269

Optional Secure Digital ......................................................................................................................... 269

Secondary Compact Flash ..................................................................................................................... 270

Storage Module..................................................................................................................................... 270

Digitizer Maintenance .............................................................................................................................. 271

Run Remote Check Tests....................................................................................................................... 271

Advanced Self Test Capabilities ............................................................................................................ 271

Troubleshooting & Service .................................................................................................................... 272

Hardware Problems .............................................................................................................................. 272

Installing New Firmware ....................................................................................................................... 272

Preventive Maintenance ....................................................................................................................... 272

Desiccant Replacement.....................................................................................................................................272

Replacing Batteries ...........................................................................................................................................273

Replacing Compact Flash Cards and SD Cards ..................................................................................................274

Cleaning the Digitizer ........................................................................................................................................275

Decommissioning & Recycling .............................................................................................................. 275

Kinemetrics Recycling Passport ........................................................................................................................276

Disassembly Procedure for Recycling ...............................................................................................................277

Materials for Recycling .....................................................................................................................................279

System Description ................................................................................................................................... 280


Page vii
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Intelligent Power Supply System .......................................................................................................... 281

Supercapacitor Backup .....................................................................................................................................281

Battery Charging ...............................................................................................................................................282

Sequenced Start Up ..........................................................................................................................................282

Sequenced Shut Down ......................................................................................................................................283

Communication with the User Via Status LEDs.................................................................................................283

Magnetic Switch................................................................................................................................................284

Temperature Monitoring ..................................................................................................................................284

Humidity Monitoring ........................................................................................................................................284

Timed Operation Windows ...............................................................................................................................285

Parametric Operation Protection .....................................................................................................................285

System Watchdog .............................................................................................................................................286

Power Fail Protection ........................................................................................................................................286

Application Specific Configuration ....................................................................................................................287

Power System Display .......................................................................................................................................288

Updating the Power Supply ..............................................................................................................................289

Processor System .................................................................................................................................. 290

Processor ..........................................................................................................................................................290

Storage ..............................................................................................................................................................290

Communication Interfaces................................................................................................................................290

GPS System .......................................................................................................................................................290

Hardware Identification ....................................................................................................................................290

Analog to Digital Converter System ...................................................................................................... 292

Individual DSP ...................................................................................................................................................292

Isolated DC/DC Power supply for Analog Section .............................................................................................292

Isolation Barrier to Analog Section ...................................................................................................................292

Four Delta Sigma ADC Converters ....................................................................................................................292

Adjustable Gain Input Stages ............................................................................................................................292

Calibration and Control Processor & Mass position/Auxiliary ADC ..................................................................292

Page viii
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

External Sensor Input Boards ................................................................................................................ 293

Military Style Connectors ..................................................................................................................................293

EMI/RFI and Transient Protection Circuitry ......................................................................................................293

Calibration and Sensor Control Signal Outputs.................................................................................................293

Basalt EpiSensor Internal Deck Theory of Operation............................................................................ 293

Working Principle ..............................................................................................................................................294

Pole Zero Representation of the EpiSensor ......................................................................................................294

Polarity Conventions .........................................................................................................................................295

Operating Firmware Description .......................................................................................................... 296

Linux Overview..................................................................................................................................................296

Software Development Tools ...........................................................................................................................304

Hardware Reference ................................................................................................................................. 305

System Power Requirements ................................................................................................................ 305

Connector Reference ............................................................................................................................ 306

Power Connector ..............................................................................................................................................306

Serial, USB, Console Connector ........................................................................................................................308

Ethernet 1 Connector .......................................................................................................................................311

POTS Modem Option Connector ......................................................................................................................313

Internal GPS System ..........................................................................................................................................315

Optional External GPS System ..........................................................................................................................316

External Three Channel Sensor Interface .........................................................................................................318

External 4th Channel Single Input Sensor Connector .......................................................................................319

Four Channel Terminal Board Dual Supply (KMI 111915-01) ...........................................................................320

Four Channel Terminal Board Single Supply (KMI 111915-02) .........................................................................321

Optional RS232 Full Serial Port Connector .......................................................................................................322

Optional RS232 Dual Serial Port Connector with Power...................................................................................324

Optional Ethernet 2 Connector .........................................................................................................................325

Cable Drawings ..................................................................................................................................... 327

Page ix
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

P/N 112297-PL, Power and Battery ..................................................................................................................327

P/N 112250-PL, Optional Power Supply ...........................................................................................................328

P/N 112259-PL, Optional Power Supply with Battery Connections ..................................................................329

P/N 112295-PL, Full Serial Port .........................................................................................................................331

P/N 112293-PL, Standard Ethernet ...................................................................................................................332

P/N 112075-PL, Time Over Ethernet ..........................................................................................................333

P/N 112298-PL, Optional Serial Port .................................................................................................................334

P/N 111941-PL, Optional Dual Serial Port.........................................................................................................335

P/N 111946-PL, Optional Modem .....................................................................................................................336

P/N 111859, External GPS Cables .....................................................................................................................337

P/N 111853 External GPS Option ......................................................................................................................338

Further information .................................................................................................................................. 339

Glossary ..................................................................................................................................................... 339

Index.......................................................................................................................................................... 341

Page x
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Safety
These symbols may appear on Kinemetrics equipment or in this manual:

When you see this symbol, pay careful attention. Refer to the similarly marked, relevant part
of this manual before servicing the instrument.

This symbol means a low-noise earth ground. The noted item should be grounded to ensure
low-noise operation, and to serve as a ground return for EMI/RFI and transients. Such a
ground does not work as a safety ground for protection against electrical shock!

This symbol means an alternating current (AC) power line.

This symbol means a direct current (DC) power line derived from an AC power line.

This symbol indicates an electrostatic sensitive device (ESD), meaning that when handling the
marked equipment you should observe all standard precautions for handling such devices.

This symbol indicates that a particular step/process or procedure is required to ensure the
installation maintains conformity to European requirements.

This symbol indicates that this referenced equipment or material should be re-cycled and not
thrown in the normal trash stream.

This symbol indicates that the step/process or equipment has an environmental consequence
and steps such as recycling are required.

These safety-related terms appear in this manual:

NOTE: Statements identify information that you should consider before moving to the
next instruction or choice.

Caution: Statements identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to the equipment, the
software, or other property.

WARNING! Statements identify conditions or practices that could result in personal injury or loss of life.

Follow the precautions below to ensure your personal safety and prevent damage to the digitizer. The
unit is powered by an 8-16 VDC source or 15.5 VDC supplied by the optional power supply assembly,
from external batteries or from a solar charging system. The unit can also contain charge an external
Sealed Lead Acid Battery (SLA) that can power the unit when the external power sources fail.

Optional Power Supply Assembly


If you plan to power the digitizer from the mains supply, we recommend Kinemetrics Power Supply
Assembly (PSA)(KMI 112251-PL or KMI 112259-PL for use with SLA Battery.) Plug the PSAs power cord
into AC outlets that will not apply more than 260 VRMS between the supply conductors or between
either supply conductor and ground. A protective ground connection (provided through the grounding

Page xii
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

conductor in the PSA and its power cord) is essential for safe operation. The PSA is designed for indoor
use only; it must not be subject to immersion in water, high humidity, or temperatures above 70C.

User-Supplied Batteries or Charging System


If you supply your own charging system, make sure the system provides the correct voltage and current
required by the unit. If you derive power from the mains supply, make sure there is adequate grounding
for all the equipment. If you supply your own batteries, follow the warnings below.

External Battery
Follow the precautions in this manual when handling and replacing external batteries. Metallic
instruments of any kind could short the battery terminals, resulting in fire or explosion. Do not drop the
battery or attempt to disassemble it. When charging the battery, use a properly rated charger and do
not overcharge the battery. The only correct replacement battery is a sealed lead-acid battery with relief
vents and ratings comparable to the original battery. Never try to use a non-rechargeable battery with
the unit.

Grounding the Digitizer


When using the optional PSA to power the unit from the AC mains supply, remember that the unit is
grounded through the PSA power cord. To avoid electric shock, plug the PSA cord into a properly wired
receptacle where the protective earth ground has been verified. Do this verification before making any
power connections to the unit.

Page xiii
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Use the Proper Power Cord


Use the power cord and connector supplied with optional PSA, or an equivalent IEC-standard power
cord. Be sure that it is in good condition.

Antenna, Phone & LAN Cabling


Never install antenna, telephone, or LAN wiring during electrical storms. Always ensure adequate
separation between antenna cabling, telecom cabling, or LAN cabling and high voltage wiring. Always
perform a safety check on telecom and LAN wiring to measure the voltage before working on the wiring.
Remember telephone wiring carries fifty (50) to sixty (60) volts of DC and the ring signal at ninety (90)
VAC can deliver a very uncomfortable shock. Power over Ethernet Cabling can carry DC voltages of up to
56VDC. To avoid electric shock, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits to telephone-
network voltage (TNV) circuits. Ethernet LAN ports contain SELV circuits, and some WAN ports contain
TNV circuits. Some LAN and WAN ports both use RJ-45 connectors. Use caution when connecting cables.

Do Not Operate in Explosive Atmospheres


The unit and the optional PSA provide no explosive protection from static discharges or arcing
components. Do not operate the equipment in an atmosphere of explosive gases.

The Kinemetrics' Rock Digitizer is not To Be Used For Life Support or Life-Critical
Systems
These products are not designed for operating life critical support systems and should not be used in
applications where failure to perform can reasonably be expected to create a risk of harm to property or
persons (including the risk of bodily injury and death)

Page xiv
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Introduction
This manual describes the basic operation of the Kinemetrics Rock Digitizers, which include the Granite
and Basalt multichannel data acquisition systems. The System Overview gives a brief overview of the
unit. This is followed by the Installation & Setup instructions which will allow you to get the unit
working. The Basic Operation section show how to use the unit for most simple operations, and is
followed by specific instructions on various common tasks, the Advanced Operation section shows
how to perform more complex tasks. The Detailed System Description describes in detail the various
sub-systems of the digitizer, the various software components, and more. Finally, the Hardware
Reference section explains items such as maintenance and wiring cables. It contains detailed
information on the hardware of the digitizer, as well as operational information on the digitizers
software. See the section Further Information for additional software and hardware references. The
diagram below shows where you will find particular information.

Introduction Basic Navigation

Rockhound Software
System Overview Front Panel Components
Sensor Interfaces

Network Planning
Installing Digitizer
Installation & Setup Connecting Digitizer
Sensor Connections
Basic Setup
Parameters
Basic Operation File Management
File Viewing

Changing Layouts
Advanced Operation Configuration
Networking & Security

Power Supply
Processor
System Description ADC/DSP Board & Sensor Interface
System Firmware
Preventive Maintenance
Detailed Electrical Interfaces
Hardware Reference Cable Diagrams
Decommissioning & Recycling

Links to Documentation
Further Information Other Links of Interest

Page 1
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

System Overview
The Rock multi-channel data acquisition systems consist of a chassis containing external connectors to
allow the user to interface the system to voltage output sensors. A Basalt can have 4 or 8 individual
sensor channels depending on its configuration, and is available with an internal three channel
accelerometer. A Granite can have 12, 20, 24 or 36 individual sensor channels depending on its
configuration. The signals from these sensors are digitized on individual four channel Analog to Digital
Converter boards. The signals are then filtered, processed by a high speed Digital Signal Processing
system and passed over a high speed serial link to the systems main processor. This consists of a low
power highly integrated processor running Linux and Kinemetrics Rockhound software, one or two
Ethernet interfaces, two or more serial ports, fixed and removable storage devices, as well as high
resolution sensor inputs. There are also other optional interfaces and options.

The Basalt and Granite are members of the larger Kinemetrics Rock product family, and as such may be
used in conjunction with other Kinemetrics Rock products.

The user interaction with the system is through the Rockhound software for set-up, control, and
operation of the system, and through the Front Panel connectors for the physical connection of power,
sensors, communication devices, and GPS to the system.

What is Rockhound?
Rockhound is the software system used by the digitizer to acquire, process, store, and transfer data.
Rockhound is very flexible allowing processing and manipulation of data in a variety of ways.

By default, Rockhound is configured as a triggered event recorder with traditional Kinemetrics trigger
methods, levels, and data formats. You are free to reconfigure software to not only change trigger
settings, but triggering criteria, and output data formats. Further, the system can be set for applications
such as continuous or timed recording or telemetry. This flexibility is achieved using software modules
that exchange data in an output-neutral format. These modules may be combined in many ways. You
even have the option to write your own modules using the optional Software Development Kit.

See the section Further Information for additional software references.

Page 2
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Front Panel
The front panel consists of connectors allowing you to connect power, sensors, GPS, serial and Ethernet
connections as well as other options. The front panel is modular allowing additional interfaces to be
added as required by the customer without burdening all units with the additional expense and power
requirements of all available interfaces. In this section we describe the connectors and the cables and
accessories associated with them.

Connectors are provided for:

Sensor Inputs
Power
Console/Serial/USB
Ethernet port
GPS Antenna
Additional optional interfaces as ordered

LEDs are provided for:

Power
Status
Event
Ethernet Link
Ethernet Data

A magnetic switch is provided to force the unit on and off in abnormal situations and a seal screw is
provided for factory leak testing.

Page 3
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Standard Interfaces

The standard interfaces (those provided with all units) include the following:

Power:
This connector provides access to external power input, and the external battery connection. It also
provides a single digital input and a digital output for user use.

The external power input allows provision of an external DC power source that is used both to
operate the unit and charge a battery, if connected. The voltage should be limited to 8-18 VDC and
we normally recommend 15.5 VDC input if the unit is to charge a back-up battery, and 12 VDC if the
customer is supplying the battery backup charging system.

The external battery connection is used to connect a Valve Regulated Lead Acid (VRLA) battery that
will be float charged by the system to provide operational autonomy in the case of temporary loss of
external power.

The digital input and output can be used to turn the system on and allow the unit to control other
equipment depending on the program in the unit.

Kinemetrics supplies both cables assemblies and cable assemblies with wide input AC to DC power
supplies the following are available:

Molded cable with Pigtails for user supplied DC power source and battery - P/N 112297-PL,
Power and Battery.
Wide Input AC Power Supply with US AC Cord and Molded Cable - P/N 112250-PL, Optional
Power Supply (NOTE: P/N 112251-PL does not include the US AC Cord)
Wide Input AC Power Supply with US AC Cord and Battery Connections - P/N 112259-PL,
Optional Power Supply with Battery Connections
NOTE: The one wire interface on the connector is for use in future Kinemetrics-
supplied power options.

For more information on the power connection refer to the Power Connector section.

Console/Serial/USB:
This connector provides access to the console port connection, primary serial port, and USB device
interface.

Cables to this connector are available in several configurations from Kinemetrics.

The console port connection is used to provide access to an operating system console that is
required in initial setup of the system (before network interfaces are defined) and in certain
diagnostic and maintenance operations. The console port is not needed in normal operation.
Typically, only a few console capable cables will be needed to support a large number of installed
units.

Page 4
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

The console is /dev/console. The default baud rate is 38400. The serial port is an RS-232 serial port
that can be used by user application software for a variety of purposes. The serial port supports full
hardware handshaking.

The primary serial port is /dev/ttyS0, the default baud rate is 9600.

The USB device interface allows use of the unit as a USB device from a USB host (the host is typically
something like a PC). Compatible software will be required on the host end to utilize this interface.
The USB is planned for future use and is not functional as of this manual revision.

The cable to connect to the Console is P/N 112294-PL, Console Port.

The cable to connect to the Serial Port is P/N 112295-PL, Full Serial Port.

For additional information refer to the Serial, USB, Console Connector section.

Ethernet:
This connector provides a low power 10Mb Ethernet connection. The cable to connect to this ports
is P/N 112293-PL, Standard Ethernet.

Ethernet is used for connection to other equipment, such as other digitizers and/or a hub or switch.

With the POE (Power Over Ethernet) option installed it can also allow the digitizer to act as a class 1
powered device on a POE LAN.

For additional information on the Ethernet Interface connections consult the Ethernet 1 Connector
section.

GPS:
This connector provides the connection to an active 3.3V GPS Antenna to allow reception of GPS
timing and position signals. These antennas contain low noise amplifiers which are powered by a
DC current through the antenna cable. The following cable options may be supplied with your unit:

No GPS antenna or cable


Trimble MiniMag 3V antenna with 5 meter cable (P/N 110905-PL, GPS 5 Meter, MiniMag)
Trimble Bullet 3V antenna with:
25 meter plenum cable (P/N 111095-01-25-PL, GPS Bullet Antenna 25m Cable)
50 meter plenum cable (P/N 111095-01-50-PL)
25 meter UV-resistant cable (P/N 111095-02-25-PL)
50 meter UV-resistant cable (P/N 111095-02-50-PL)
For additional information on the Antenna and Cabling consult the GPS Antenna Connections
section.

Page 5
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

LEDs
The LEDs on the front panel provide the following information:

Power:

OFF - No power
Steady Green - Running off of external power or POE (Power Over Ethernet)
Flashing Green - The system is starting up
Infrequent Green - Running off of battery

Status:

OFF - Working, no time source


Steady Red - Power supply bootloader turn on. Used to load new power supply firmware
Flashing Red - System Fault detected
Infrequent Red - System Error detected
Steady Green - Waiting to turn on. In initial start up delays or timed operation window
Flashing Green - The system is starting up
Infrequent Green - Working, a time source is being used (digitizers only)
Orange - Supercapacitor is being charged
Alternating Red and Green - The system is shutting down

Event:

OFF - No events
Steady Green - Real time data stream (digitizers only)
Flashing Green - Unused condition
Infrequent Green - Events stored (digitizers only)

Ethernet Link (Green):

ON - Ethernet 10Mb link detected


OFF - No Ethernet link detected

Ethernet Data (Amber):

ON - Ethernet data transmission in progress


OFF - Idle

Page 6
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Magnetic Switch
The magnetic switch is located above and to the right of the Console/Serial/USB connector. The small
target on the label gives the exact location of the switch. The switch is used to start up and shut down
the unit without use of a physical power switch.

The unit has no power switch. When power is connected, the unit's default behavior is to power up and
begin operation. When power is removed, the applications and operating system will shut down and the
unit will turn off.

Briefly touching a strong magnet to the magnetic switch location allows the user to start and stop the
unit. This is useful if say a time window has been set incorrectly and the unit needs to be turned on to
correct the problem.

Seal Screw
The small screw located in the lower right of the front panel is the seal screw. It is used at the
factory for leak testing.

Caution: This screw should NOT be removed by the user as doing so may expose the internals of the
unit to the environment and damage it.
Sensor Interfaces

In Rock Digitizers each four channel ADC board connects to a three channel and a single fourth channel
connector on the Front of the unit. The military style connectors can be used to directly to connect to
sensors or a four channel Terminal board can be plugged into the two connectors to give a four channel
terminal board interface which allows easy field connections of sensors without soldering.

External Three Channel Sensor Interface

This connector has the same pinout as used in the Q330 unit. The connector has three high resolution
input channels, three mass position/auxiliary 12 bit resolution inputs, a calibration output signal and its
associated control, three other outputs for sensor control, a switched system power output, and an
interface to allow a one wire device embedded in the sensor to be read.

Kinemetrics supplies cables for connecting a large variety of sensors or you can build your own sensor
cables. More information on the cables and connector interface is in External Three Channel Sensor
Interface section.

Internal Accelerometer Deck

The Basalt Accelerograph unit contains a tri-axial EpiSensor deck connected to channels 1-3 of the ADC.
The deck provides three orthogonal 2g (Optionally 4g) Full Scale sensors mounted internally to the unit.
This unit is equipped with a single point mounting scheme and must be leveled and securely mounted to
ensure high fidelity string motion recording. The fourth channel is available as an additional input to the
system.

Page 7
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

External 4th Channel Single Input Sensor Connector

This connector provides a single high resolution input to the fourth channel of the ADC that can be used
for a uniaxial active or passive sensor. It also provides a separately switched calibration output, a power
output, and four additional one wire interface connections.

Kinemetrics supplies cables for connecting a large variety of sensors or you can build your own sensor
cables. More information on the cables and connector interface is in External 4th Channel Single Input
Sensor Connector section.

Four Channel Terminal Board (KMI 111915)

This board is available to support both dual supply (-01) and single supply sensors (-02). It provides a
terminal block to allow easy connection of uniaxial, biaxial, or triaxial sensors. For details on the
connection locations on the terminal blocks and other information refer to the Four Channel Terminal
Board (KMI 111915) section.

Optional Interfaces

The unit allows for the addition of several optional expansion boards as ordered to increase the
capabilities of the system.

Please note that the inclusion of additional option boards will have an impact on overall power
consumption.

The system supports three additional option slots which can be used in various combinations as follows:

Additional full serial ports


Additional Dual Serial Ports
Internal POTS modem interface
External GPS System

Future options are planned consult Kinemetrics for more information.

Standard Basalt and Granite systems normally contain a Dual Serial Port and a POTS modem as pre-
configured options.

Full Serial Port Options:


This option provides a full function RS-232 serial port that can be used by user application software
for a variety of purposes and is fully supported by the Rockhound application. The serial port
supports full hardware handshaking and is connected using Kinemetrics cable P/N 112298-PL,
Optional Serial Port .

Dual Serial Port Options:


This connector provides two RS-232 serial ports with limited hardware handshaking capabilities.
The connector also provides switched power that can be used by user application software for a
variety of purposes and is fully supported by the Rockhound application. This connects to
Kinemetrics cable P/N 111941-PL, Optional Dual Serial Port .

Page 8
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

POTS Modem Options:


This connector provides a connection to an internal POTS (Plain Old Telephone System) Modem.
This modem can be used by user application software for a variety of purposes and is fully
supported by the Rockhound application. This connects to Kinemetrics cable P/N 111946-PL,
Optional Modem .

EXT GPS:
This connector is for an optional external GPS engine. The external GPS engine allows for the
integrated GPS engine/antenna to be placed at much greater distances from the digitizer. Distances
of 1500 feet (~450m) are achievable using standard CAT-5 cabling.

The external GPS option kit (P/N 111853-PL) includes:

An external GPS option board (P/N 111855-PL) installed in the unit


An external GPS cable kit (P/N 111859-PL) including:
o A cable to connect the external GPS connector to a weather resistant RJ-45
compatible jack
o A cable to connect the GPS engine/antenna to a weather resistant RJ-45 compatible
jack
o Two field installation kits plus crimping tool to attach weather resistant RJ45
compatible plugs to each end of a custom length of CAT-5 cabling.
The GPS engine/antenna (P/N 700520)
A wall mounting bracket (P/N 111854) and associated fasteners to attach the GPS
engine/antenna to the exterior of a structure or other support

Note: CAT-5 cabling is often provided by the customer, but is also available from Kinemetrics if
needed. If the cabling does not need to be weather resistant, an ordinary CAT-5 patch cable may be
used.

Check with Kinemetrics for the availability of other option boards.

Page 9
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Installation & Setup


To successfully deploy your digitizer, you will need to physically install the hardware in a suitable
environment, install the sensors you plan to use with their associated cabling and connect them to the
unit, provide your primary and backup power sources (if any), connect any communications links, install
the GPS antenna can connect the cable to unit, and configure the software for correct operation if your
requirements differ from the default factory configuration of the unit.

If you have not already done so, we recommend that you install the software from the Rock Support
Software CD (300654-PL) now so that you will have the necessary utilities such as terminal emulation,
telnet client, and secure file transfer programs. You are of course free to use other software that you are
more familiar with that provides the same capabilities.

The basic steps to install your digitizer are as follows:

Secure the unit physically in position


Attach the grounding stud
Mount the Sensors as appropriate and connect their cables
Mount the GPS Antenna
Connect the Ethernet LAN
Connect the GPS Antenna
Connect other communication interfaces
Connect the sensors
Connect the optional SLA (sealed lead-acid) battery
Connect the DC power source
Connect a laptop or equivalent to the console port (See Software Installation)
Change the default system passwords (See Passwords)
Configure the software:
o Configure the LAN (See Network Configuration)
o Configure desired IP services (See IP Services)
o Configure extended storage
o Configure Rockhound (See Basic Setup)
o Configure NTP (See Keeping Time)

At this point, the system should be functional. See the section on Basic Operation for further details on
initial configuration of the system.

Note that several of the configuration and update steps listed above can be tested in the lab before the
unit is deployed.

Page 10
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Page 11
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Operating Environment
The digitizer needs to be installed in a location that provides the following environmental conditions.

Operating Temperatures

The digitizers operating temperature range with the standard options is:

Standard digitizer -20 to +60 OC Operation (optional -30 to +70OC)

This can be limited by user installed equipment. Replacing the storage cards with commodity cards can
reduce the operating temperature range.

The digitizer is configured to only charge an attached Sealed Lead Acid (SLA) battery from:

Battery Charge -0.0 to + 40.0 OC

The unit will draw power from an SLA battery over the full operating temperature range but will show a
fault if it runs outside of the range:

Battery Normal Discharge - 15.0 to + 50.0 OC

Finally units with the optional storage module that contains a hard drive have an operating range for the
hard drive of:

Optional Hard Drive 0.0 to + 50.0 OC

The unit should not be placed where it is exposed to direct sunlight and the external battery of used
should be located in the same temperature environment as the unit and should again not be exposed to
direct sunlight.

Operating Humidity

The case of the unit is designed to meet the requirements of a NEMA 6P enclosure (equivalent to IP67).
The system can operate in humidity levels of up to 100% and withstand occasional temporary immersion
in water up to 2 meters in depth. The system should not be continuously immersed, as galvanic
corrosion of the connectors will occur, potentially destroying the system. To ensure operation in high
humidity, the desiccant packet must be fresh and the case of the unit should be carefully re-sealed if it is
opened. The unit should be protected from rain and snow and should not be allowed to stand in water
for longer than one hour.

Page 13
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Operating Altitude

The unit can operate at altitudes from -300 to +10,000 meters.

Unpacking & Inspecting the Unit


Before accepting the shipment the shipping carton should be examined for any obvious damage and this
should be recorded by the freight carrier.

The digitizer ships in a custom designed carton. This carton can be used to return the unit or to ship it to
other destinations. It should be carefully opened at the top so it can be re-used.

On top of the unit is an additional carton that will contain any accessories ordered with the unit such as
connectors, cables, AC/DC power supply. Please check the contents of this box against the packing list.

The digitizer is beneath this box packed in custom foam inserts with the front face connectors facing
upwards. Carefully pull the unit and the inserts from the box. The unit should have no signs of external
damage.

The unit is then ready for installation.

See Practice Assembly

When the packaging is no longer required please recycle the cardboard cartons and foam insert
appropriately.

Requirements for Installation


Below we provide lists of the tools, supplies and equipment required to install a Rock digitizer in a
typical configuration.

Specialized installations may require additional tools, supplies or equipment, depending on specific sites
and needs. This manual assumes that all civil engineering works (concrete pads, enclosures, conduit,
mounting masts, etc.) are complete and ready before installation.

Required Tools

For a permanent installation the unit should be mounted to the floor, wall, or shelf in the structure.

The following tools are suggested:

A drill capable of drilling into the attachment surface.


Appropriate drill bits for the attachment surface.
Suitable tools to install the screws/anchors into the attachment surface.

Page 14
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Optional Tools

Communication options, GPS systems, and other advanced installations require additional tools:

Wrench or pliers to tighten the antenna connectors


Tools for mounting the antenna
A heat gun (electric or butane)
Soldering iron (electric or butane)
Small screwdriver
Wire cutters
Wire strippers
Long-nose pliers
Utility knife
A drill (electric or battery powered)
Cable tie wraps
A crimping tool
A short length of insulated braid
An extension cord or a small generator for AC power, if butane-powered soldering irons and
battery-powered drills are not available

Required Supplies

Mounting hardware, screws, nuts, washers, concrete anchors studs etc (Dependent on selected
mounting method)
Material to make grounding straps for the unit
Solder with rosin-core flux
An assortment of heat-shrink tubing, cable tie-wraps, and electrical tape

Required Equipment

A computer running Windows, Linux, or other suitable operating System


A serial port on the computer in order to access the system console. This may be an internal
serial port or one provided through a USB to serial adapter.
An Ethernet network interface if you intend to use the networking capabilities
Kinemetrics' Console cable (112294-PL) to link a laptop to the unit

Optional Equipment

A battery-powered digital volt meter (DVM) for system-checkout functions


A portable printer, to print tests, configurations, and other commissioning data
A digital camera, to photograph the completed installations

Page 15
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Practice Assembly
Once you have assembled the tools, supplies, and equipment listed above, we recommend that you run
through a practice assembly following the installation instructions.

Why Practice in the Laboratory/Office?

The connections between all the components mentioned in this manual may appear a bit complex. They
will be even more complex if your first installation attempt is in a remote field situation where you find
that you lack the necessary tools, supplies, or equipment to make the connections work.

Practice in a well-supplied, well-lit laboratory or office when first connecting and setting up the unit and
ancillary equipment. Follow these instructions carefully, step by step, to learn exactly which tools,
supplies and equipment will be needed in the field.

Murphy's Law provides a further reason for a practice installation:

If anything can go wrong, it will; and Isaac's Corollary: Murphy was an optimist!

See Unpacking and Inspecting the Unit

Planning your installation


This section discusses recording network setup and operating modes. Networking capabilities are an
important part of this equipment, and should be considered carefully to make sure that adequate
remote access and bandwidth are provided to utilize the real time capabilities of the digitizer.

Network Planning

Carefully consider the scientific objectives of the installation when planning the network, whether it
includes one station or a hundred.

The station location, type and position of sensors, and instrument settings all affect the type of data
recorded. Consider local seismic-noise conditions and the anticipated amplitude of events being
recorded. This will help you correctly set trigger parameters, estimate the quantity of data expected,
and decide how to retrieve the data.

Its also necessary to plan how to analyze, combine, and archive data, as well as how to service and
maintain the network. Finally, consider how the network will function after a large event, when mains
power and telecommunications might not be available for a considerable time. Under such
circumstances, how do you plan to retrieve and process the network's data, as well as continue
operating it?

Page 16
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Civil Engineering

Before installing the digitizer, plan and construct (if necessary) the housing that will provide a protective
infrastructure for the unit. The exact details of the installation depend on local conditions, local
regulations, and the purposes of the installation.

Except in cases of a rapid emergency deployment of seismic instruments, the digitizer should be housed
in a protective structure. Below are the two typical types of installation settings and related protective
structures. They can be used as rough guidelines for an installation.

Free-Field Installations

In a free-field accelerograph installation, the digitizer is installed some distance from buildings in a "free
field" and sheltered by a small, lightweight structure that allows the sensor to sense acceleration as
close as possible to the "true" accelerations of ambient ground motion. In softer ground sites, because
of the soil-structure interactions during earthquakes, a heavier-than-necessary protective structure
could degrade data accuracy.

The structure should also protect the digitizer from weather, direct sunlight, and theft or vandalism. A
"transformer hut" made of fiberglass and stainless steel hardware is ideal as long as it, and the digitizer,
are attached to a poured and reinforced concrete pad. If true hard-rock site response is desired, anchor
this concrete pad to bedrock.

If you are using the digitizer with broadband sensors, it must be placed in a seismic vault with a pier on
which to mount the sensors. This vault will need to not only protect the instrument, as in the case of the
free-field accelerograph, but also must provide a stable mounting structure and insulate the sensors
from ambient temperature variations. It should be a low-noise site for optimal operation. Masts for
antennas, GPS, wireless communication and solar cells should be mounted some distance from the
sensor vault to prevent wind-induced noise from contaminating the data. Kinemetrics has several
application notes that can help you install a broadband sensor network.

Provide the digitizer with a good earth ground. Proper grounding depends greatly on the humidity of the
soil at the site. For average-humidity soil, an effective earth ground can be made by wiring the case
grounding stud to a 6'- to 8'-long copper rod embedded in the ground.

If no AC power is available, a solar charging system is required. Refer to the Advanced Installations
section of this manual for more information.

If the digitizer has a GPS system, the GPS antenna will need a suitable mounting mast. A telephone line,
DSL line, or other communication link is required to communicate with the digitizer remotely.

Page 17
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Structural-Monitoring Installations

In a structural-monitoring installation, you provide protection to the digitizer by installing it within an


existing building or structure (a bridge, a dam, a high-rise, etc.). The main purpose for installing the
digitizer in an existing structure is to measure and monitor the structure's vibrations in response to
ground motion. While some use such installations to calculate measurements of "free-field" seismic
motions, the very nature of the structure's size and foundation depth cause the acceleration
measurements to deviate considerably from "true free-field" response.

For a structural-monitoring installation, make sure the space in the structure allows enough room to
mount and service the digitizer, and that the space provides enough protection so the digitizer and its
sensors will not be disturbed or vandalized. Powering the digitizer requires a mains supply close to the
installation point. To connect a modem, a phone line is also necessary.

As for the digitizers optional GPS antenna, carefully plan to locate the antenna close enough to the
digitizer so the supplied GPS cable will reach between the two.

To use multiple sensors mounted around the structure, make a detailed plan of the sensors' locations
and plan how to run the cables between them and the digitizer. To interconnect digitizers, plan the
layout of the interconnecting cables. If possible, run all the cables (sensor and interconnect) through
grounded metal conduit.

All these elements of an installation should be in place before the digitizer itself is installed.

Installing the Digitizer


The unit should be installed preferably in a dry environment protected from direct sunlight and
exposure to standing moisture. The temperature should be within the operating limits given earlier. The
unit should also be protected from animals that may eat cabling and from vandalism. If an external
battery is used it is important it is mounted close to the unit and exposed to the same temperature
conditions so the temperature adjusted charge voltage is correct. As you perform the installation pay
particular attention to the warning below.

WARNING! Antenna, Phone, & LAN Cabling. Never install antenna, telephone, or LAN wiring during electrical
storms. Always ensure adequate separation between antenna cabling, telecom cabling, or LAN cabling and high
voltage wiring. Always perform a safety check on telecom and LAN wiring to measure the voltage before working
on the wiring. Remember telephone wiring carries fifty (50) to sixty (60) volts of DC and the ring signal at ninety
(90) VAC can deliver a very uncomfortable shock. Power over Ethernet Cabling can carry DC voltages of up to
56VDC. To avoid electric shock, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits to telephone-network
voltage (TNV) circuits. Ethernet LAN ports contain SELV circuits, and some WAN ports contain TNV circuits. Some
LAN and WAN ports both use RJ-45 connectors. Use caution when connecting cables.

Page 18
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Mount the Unit

The unit can be mounted on the:

Floor
Shelf
Wall

Floor-Mounting:
The unit should be placed on a dry floor. It is recommended that the unit be anchored to the floor
using concrete anchors. These can be used to mount the unit using the slots on the front and rear of
the units. The optional external battery should be mounted in close proximity and can be held with
straps anchored by concrete anchors.

Shelf-Mounting
1. Temporarily place the unit in the correct position. Mark the location of the slots on the shelf.
2. Drill a hole with a 1/4" (6.4mm) drill through the shelf at three or more locations.
3. Insert 1/4-20 bolts with washers through the slots from the top and secure underneath the shelf
with washers and nuts.

The optional battery can be mounted on the shelf if it is sufficiently sturdy or on the floor below the
unit.

Wall-Mounting
1. Use a piece of 1 aluminum angle bracket sturdy enough to hold the unit. Attach the bracket to
the unit using the holes on the rear rail.
2. Then attach the bracket to the wall using suitable heavy duty anchors.

Mounting the Basalt Accelerograph


For Basalts with an internal deck, the unit must be securely coupled to the ground to accurately
record ground motion.

The unit has a single hole through the unit for a -20 8 threaded stud. To attach the Basalt to the
mounting surface, use the mounting kit shipped with the recorder. It includes a heavy-duty wedge
type expansion anchor stud with 1/4-20 thread, a tool to set the anchor, a flat washer, and a nut.
The following figures show the details of such an installation.

Caution: Invalid data. Basalts with internal EpiSensor decks must be securely floor-mounted to
ensure the acceleration levels of the actual structure are measured.

Page 19
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Anchor the recorder unit to a concrete floor if possible. Be sure that each of the recorder's leveling
feet are screwed into place and extending less than from the bottom of the unit. The locking nuts
should be loosened.

1. Move the recorder gently to one side.


2. Locate where you plan to put the recorder, keeping in mind necessary working space. With the
recorder mounted with connectors facing forward, you should allow 10 (254mm) clearance to
the rear, front, and left. You should allow 15 (375mm) clearance to the right.
3. Use a drill with a 3/8" (9.5 mm) bit, and drill into the concrete to a depth slightly deeper than
the length of the anchor (1 or 25.4mm). A percussion or hammer drill will make this procedure
much easier. You should follow all recommended safety precautions when using power tools
and we recommend you wear safety glasses during the installation procedure. (Using the anchor
set tool as a depth gage can make this easier. Mark the thick end with a piece of tape at the
depth of the stud check the hole depth with this.)

4. Make sure you clean out the hole after drilling it. (Using a flexible drinking straw works very well
for this, but make sure you don't blow dust in your eyes!)
5. Set the anchor using the anchor set tool. Place the anchor in the hole. The top should be flush
with the floor. Place the thin end of the anchor set vertically into the anchor. Strike with a
hammer until the shoulder of the anchor set tool is flush with the top of the anchor.

Page 20
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

6. Screw the 8 stud into the anchor.

Caution: The 8 stud is a potential safety hazard, so do not leave it sticking up in the air!
7. Center the Basalt over the stud and lower its mounting hole down over the protruding stud.
8. Place the flat washer onto the stud. Then screw the nut onto the stud without tightening.
9. Make sure the Basalt is oriented in the correct direction before you proceed with Step 11.
10. Look at the bubble level window while you carefully adjust each of the Basalt's three leveling
feet in or out. When you can see the air bubble centered in the bubble level window with all
three leveling feet resting on the mounting pad, the recorder is level.

Page 21
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

11. Tighten the locking nuts on the leveling feet.


12. Carefully maintain both the Basalt's level and its orientation as you tighten down the anchor nut
to hold the recorder firmly in place. Use a torque of 80-100 inch-lbs (9.2-10.2 Nm) to tighten the
nut.

The unit is now firmly attached to the ground.

Grounding the Unit

All users should complete this procedure. You must provide the digitizer with a good, low-impedance
earth ground before operating it for the following reasons:

To shunt ESD transients, lightning-induced transients and EMI/RFI transients to ground.


To meet the requirements of the European Community's EMI/RFI directives.

Page 22
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Determine what earth ground you will connect the digitizer to. A good earth ground includes the
following:

a metal plumbing pipe that is eventually buried in the ground


a copper ground rod staked in soil
a well engineered electrical grounding system, or
steel reinforcing rods that protrude from a concrete foundation.

Prepare the conductor you plan to use to connect the unit to the earth ground. For the conductor, you
should at least use a heavy-gauge wire or, better yet, a copper strap or copper braid.

Connect this conductor to the units case grounding bolt on the left center of the front rail. Then
connect the other end of the conductor/grounding strap to the selected earth ground.

NOTE: If the digitizer is powered by the optional PSA, the third pin (earth connection)
of the PSA AC plug provides the safety ground. To ensure the unit's low noise
performance, you must still connect the digitizers grounding stud to a good earth
ground as described above.

Mount the Sensors

The sensors that will be attached to the unit should be mounted according to the manufacturers
instructions. Systems equipped with Kinemetrics sensors will be provided with the sensor operating
manual which will describe how the sensor should be mounted. The cable from the sensor to the
digitizer should be installed at this time.

Mount the GPS Antenna (when using the internal GPS)

The GPS Antenna should be mounted following the directions below:

Mounting the MiniMag Antenna


The MiniMag Antenna (P/N 110905-PL, GPS 5 Meter, MiniMag) should only be used for extended
testing in the lab or brief testing in the field, as it is not very environmentally robust. It can be used
for long periods when protected in a fiberglass hut, when no external antenna mast is desired..
Mount the antenna by placing it on a flat surface within 5 meters of the Rock Digitizer. Make sure
the antenna has a good view of the sky, without any obstruction from large buildings or trees.

Page 23
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Mounting a Bullet Antenna


The bullet antenna is the preferred antenna for the majority of
installations. The antenna has a 3/4" NPT adapter for use with
standard pipe fittings.

To mount the antenna, run the antenna cable down through the
pipe. Plan the installation so that the cable from the antenna to the
Rock Digitizer no longer than the Cable length (25 or 50 meters).
Like the MiniMag antenna, the bullet antenna requires a good view
of the sky, without obstruction from large buildings or trees.

The bullet antenna comes screwed onto one end of a 3/4"-diameter


NPT adapter pipe (which threads into standard pipe fittings). Within
the adapter, the antenna is joined to a TNC connector on one end of
a 25-meter or 50-meter coaxial cable. As shown in the bullet
antenna illustration, the other end of the cable has a BNC
connector. When the antenna's mounting post is installed with a
female NPT adapter at the end, the NPT adapter should screw
snugly into the female adapter.

Caution: The 3V Bullet Antennas supplied with the Rock and Q330 Products should not be used with
the Altus Product line as this uses 5V Bullet Antennas and the antennas can be damaged. Using an
Altus 5V antenna and cable with a Rock digitizer will result in poor GPS performance and possible loss
of timing. Kinemetrics 5V Bullet Antennas use a Type F connector in the Antenna rather that the TNC
connector illustrated above.

Caution: If the GPS system will operate in an area at high risk for lightning strikes, consider installing
a lightning protector on the GPS antenna. Kinemetrics offers a lightning protector device (P/N 109457-
PL). See Section Installing Optional GPS Lightning Protection

Connect the GPS Antenna

The GPS antenna Cable can now be connected to the Digitizer using the BNC connector on the Front
panel.

Mount the Optional External GPS

The optional external GPS (P/N 111853-PL) is supplied with patch cables at the digitizer end (connected
to the EXT GPS connector) and at the engine/antenna end. These patch cables terminate with RJ-45
connectors suitable for standard CAT-5 cable and support distances up to 1500 feet (~450m).

The engine/antenna has a 3/4" NPT threaded opening for use with standard pipe fittings such as the
3/4" NPT x 12 threaded pin (P/N 870693) included with the kit.

Page 24
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

To mount the GPS engine/antenna, run the shorter


cable assembly from the P/N 111859 cables kit down
alongside the pipe with the large weather resistant
RJ45 jack installed in the mounting bracket. Install the
engine/antenna where it commands a good view of the
sky without obstruction from large buildings or trees.

Run CAT-5 cable from the antenna location to where


the digitizer is located. Install RJ-45 plugs from the
cables kit at each end of the CAT-5 cable using the
manufacturers instructions and using the crimping tool
provided. Spare RJ-45 plugs are provided if needed. Be
sure to install the RJ-45 plugs only after running the
CAT-5 cable so that the plugs do not interfere when routing through small holes and openings. Connect
one end of the CAT-5 cable to the RJ-45 jack on the engine/antenna bracket and the other end to the
external GPS cable assembly from the P/N 111859 cables kit.

Connect the GPS Engine/Antenna

The GPS engine/antenna Cable can now be connected to the digitizer.

Run the longer cable assembly from the P/N 111859 cables kit to the digitizer at the connector marked
EXT GPS. Connect the other end to the RJ-45 end CAT-5 cable that was previously connected to the GPS
engine/antenna.

Configure the Timing Source

The Timing Source of the digitizer defaults to the internal GPS.

In order to use the external GPS, you must change the Timing Source
parameter of the Rock Data Interface to select GPS External.

There are two selections for GPS


External. Less than 50 feet (~15m)
and Greater than 50 feet are the
available choices.

If there is a question, the Greater than 50 feet selection will always work, but will use slightly more
power than the Less than 50 feet selection.

After making the selection, remember to save and apply the changes.

Page 25
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Connect the Ethernet Connection

The digitizer can now be connected to the Local Area Network using the Ethernet Cable. The RJ45 plug
from this cable should be inserted into a suitable Ethernet switch to make the connection. As the
digitizer is a 10 Base-T device it is better to connect to a switch than to a hub. The connection can also
be made to a Router or other Ethernet based communication device. If directly connecting to a Laptop
or PC a crossover adapter will be required.

Connecting the Optional Communication Interfaces

The optional communication options can now be connected appropriately.

Connecting the Sensors to the Digitizer

Rock Digitizers are designed to accommodate Kinemetrics Strong Motion Sensors, Broadband Sensors,
and a variety of other sensors. This section provides details on connecting the sensors, the electrical
characteristics of the digitizer inputs, and the use of the calibration, control, and power available on the
sensor connectors.

Order of Sensor Connections


The units are designed to allow you to easily connect to different sensors and to reconfigure the unit for
different task by changing cables and external terminal boards. Kinemetrics provides a variety of cabling
solutions for both new installations but also to allow retrofitting older installations with the capability of
the Rock Digitizer. The sections below explain how to connect various units to the different digitizer
applications.

Physical to Virtual Channel Mapping


To make life easier the Rock Granite can map its physical channels to virtual channels that allows
easier grouping of the sensors. This allows the order the channels are recorded and displayed to be
more logical for your application. So we can group all the Tri-axial sensors together for example. In
the tables below we give the physical connection to the rock digitizer and our suggested virtual
channel mapping.

Triaxial Connection Convention


To ensure compatibility with the Q330 and other weak motion recording we are using the Z (Up) N
(North) E (East) (ZNE) convention when connecting tri-axial seismometers or accelerometers to Rock
Instruments. If you build your own cables or use the terminal blocks you can obviously chose
another convention. However, as the Rock instruments can map physical channels to any virtual
channel we would suggest you adopt this physical wiring convention and use mapping to get the
order of channels you prefer.

Page 26
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Basalt 4X Connections or a 4 Channel Digitizer Block


If you have a Basalt 4X or a block of 4 channels left on a Granite you can connect the following
combinations:

4 Uniaxial Sensors
1 Triaxial & 1 Uniaxial Sensor

As shown in the table below:

4 Uniaxial 1 Triaxial
Rock Physical Channel

Sensors 1 Uniaxial
Sensors

Map1
Virtual Channel

Sensors

Map1
Virtual Channel

1 U1 V1 T1Z V1

2 U2 V2 T1N V2

3 U3 V3 T1E V3

4 U4 V4 U1 V4

In the table U stands for a Uniaxial sensor, while TiZ, TiN, TiE are the three components of the ith
Triaxial sensor.

Page 27
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Basalt 8X Connections or an 8 Channel Digitizer Block


If you have a Basalt 8X or a block of 8 channels left on a Granite you can connect the following
combinations:

8 Uniaxial Sensors
1 Triaxial & 5 Uniaxial Sensors
2 Triaxial & 2 Uniaxial Sensors

As shown in the table below:

8 Uniaxial 1 Triaxial 2 Triaxial


Rock Physical Channel

Sensors 5 Uniaxial 2 Uniaxial


Sensors

Map1
Virtual Channel

Sensors

Map1
Virtual Channel

Sensors

Map2
Virtual Channel

1 U1 V1 T1Z V1 T1Z V1

2 U2 V2 T1N V2 T1N V2

3 U3 V3 T1E V3 T1E V3

4 U4 V4 U1 V4 U1 V7

5 U5 V5 U2 V5 T2Z V4

6 U6 V6 U3 V6 T2N V5

7 U7 V7 U4 V7 T2E V6

8 U8 V8 U5 V8 U2 V8

In the table U stands for a Uniaxial sensor, while TiZ, TiN, TiE are the three components of the
ith Triaxial sensor.

Page 28
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Granite 12 Channel Block connections


To connect your sensors to a Granite you need to think of it divided into blocks of 12 channels as we
have designed the cabling and terminal boards to work as 12 channel groups. Thus a 12 Channel
Granite has one block, a 24 Channel Granite two blocks, and a 36 Channel Granite three blocks. If
you have a non-standard Granite you will have either an 8 channel block or a 4 channel block left
over. These channels can be connected as shown above.

The table below shows how we can connect the following selection of sensors to a 12 channel block:

12 Uniaxial Sensors
1 Triaxial and 9 Uniaxial sensors
2 Triaxial and 6 Uniaxial sensors
3 Triaxial and 3 Uniaxial sensors OR
4 Triaxial Sensors

12 Uniaxial 1 Triaxial 2 Triaxial 3 Triaxial 4 Triaxial


Granite Physical Channel

Sensors 9 Uniaxial 6 Uniaxial 3 Uniaxial Sensors


Sensors

Map 1
Virtual Channel

Sensors

Map 2
Virtual Channel

Sensors

Map 3
Virtual Channel

Sensors

Map 4
Virtual Channel

Sensors

Map 5
1 U1 V1 T1Z V1 T1Z V1 T1Z V1 T1Z Virtual Channel
V1

2 U2 V2 T1N V2 T1N V2 T1N V2 T1N V2

3 U3 V3 T1E V3 T1E V3 T1E V3 T1E V3

4 U4 V4 U1 V4 U1 V7 U1 V10 T4Z V10

5 U5 V5 U2 V5 T2Z V4 T2Z V4 T2Z V4

6 U6 V6 U3 V6 T2N V5 T2N V5 T2N V5

7 U7 V7 U4 V7 T2E V6 T2E V6 T2E V6

8 U8 V8 U5 V8 U2 V8 U2 V11 T4N V11

9 U9 V9 U6 V9 U3 V9 T3Z V7 T3Z V7

10 U10 V10 U7 V10 U4 V10 T3N V8 T3N V8

11 U11 V11 U8 V11 U5 V11 T3E V9 T3E V9

12 U12 V12 U9 V12 U6 V12 U3 V12 T4E V12

Page 29
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

In the table U stands for a Uniaxial sensor, while TiZ, TiN, TiE are the three components of the
ith Triaxial sensor.

The table below shows an example of a Granite with a Broadband Sensor and the other channels
used for 2 or 3 Triaxial sensors and other environmental sensors such as pressure and temperature
sensors. Generally only one broadband sensor would be connected at a given location. Obviously,
for testing or other purposes multiple Broadband sensors can be connected.
Channel
Granitite Physical

2 Triaxes Aux Sensors


Broadband

Virtual Channel Map3

Sensors
Broadband & 3 Triaxial

Virtual Channel Map3

1 VBBZ V1 VBBZ V1

2 VBBN V2 VBBN V2

3 VBBE V3 VBBE V3

4 SEN1 V10 T4Z V10

5 T1Z V4 T2Z V4

6 T1N V5 T2N V5

7 T1E V6 T2E V6

8 SEN2 V11 T4N V11

9 T2Z V7 T3Z V7

10 T2N V8 T3N V8

11 T2E V9 T3E V9

12 SEN3 V12 T4E V12

Page 30
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Contiguous Channels for 4 Tri-axial Sensors when using terminal boards


When using Digitizers with terminal boards and ES-Ts or older tri-axial sensors with discrete wiring
terminated on site it is also possible to connect four tri-axial sensors so that it is not necessary to
use a virtual channel map to get the channels in order. This is shown below where we have also
illustrated using a tri-axial sensor with the L, V, T configuration that is used in legacy installations.
Here the first two sensors are powered from the first board, with the others powered from boards 2
and 3 as illustrated below.

4 Triaxial Sensors
Granite Physical Channel

Contiguous on Terminal
Boards
Sensors

Map 1
Virtual Channel

1 T1L (Power) V1

2 T1V V2

3 T1T V3

4 T2L (Power) V4

5 T2V V5

6 T2T V6

7 T3L (Power) V7

8 T3V V8

9 T3T V9

10 T4L (Power) V10

11 T4V V11

12 T4T V12

Page 31
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Sensor Cabling
The sensor cabling should provide individual connections to each sensor we suggest each sensor has
a separate cable terminating at the connector. Cabling where power and ground connections as
shared between multiple sensors often results in degraded system performance. Cabling should
also meet all local and National wiring codes. Kinemetrics can supply plenum rated cable when
required by code.

Standard Cables
Kinemetrics supplies cables for connecting Rock Digitizers to the full range of Kinemetrics and
Streckeisen sensors. Other cables are also available including generic pigtail arrangements. Cables
are also available to connect dual supply sensors to the unit with military connectors and to connect
a tri-axial package to three 4th Channel Single Input connectors. Contact Kinemetrics for information
on your specific cabling needs. If you wish to construct your own cables the Hardware Reference
section and the details on the External Three Channel Sensor Interface and the External 4th Channel
Single Input Sensor Connector will provide the pin outs and information you require.

Connecting Sensors using the Four Channel Terminal Board


The terminal board is designed to allow configuration of multi-channel structural monitoring
systems where large number of sensors need to be connected in a centralized system. The cables
from the sensors can be simply terminated in the enclosure and then stripped with a wire stripper
and inserted into the appropriate terminal location. This solution is also ideal for setting up
temporary experiments when the terminal blocks allow quick reconfiguration of the experiment.
The only caveat is that these terminal blocks need to be protected within a building or enclosure.

The terminal block is available in two versions the -01 and -02 versions for dual and single supply
sensors respectively.

Dual Supply Four Channel Terminal Board (-01)


The dual supply unit includes a power supply that provides +/-12V power at up to 80mA per rail.
This power is derived from the switched power connection on the sensor connection and is derived
from the DC power input to the Digitizer. Ensure that the total current requirement of all sensors
added to a board is less than 80mA per rail.

The connections on the Rock Terminal Strip (-01 Version) are shown below. Each terminal strip
supports the installation of up to four uniaxial dual supply sensors. To obtain the best high
resolution performance we strongly recommend that the units are configured with differential
outputs. A 5V Full Scale Differential Output represents a good compromise between noise
performance and allowable cable length in a structural monitoring system. The input sensitivity is
software configurable within the Granite.

Page 32
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

10 Pin Connections for Dual +/-12V Sensors (-01 Version)


Pin Net Name Label Description
1 CHX + CH+ Channel X Positive Input
2 CHX - CH- Channel X Negative Input
3 CHXGND CGND Channel X Ground & Shield (ISO AGND)Note labeled CGNB on some units
4 CAL X CAL Calibration Signal
5 CENB X CENB Calibration Enable
6 AGND COM Connects to ADC Isolated Ground - Common
7 AGND COM Connects to ADC Isolated Ground - Common
8 +12VA +12V Positive 12V Supply to Sensors
9 -12VA -12V Negative 12V Supply to Sensors
10 PGP PGP Case and Shield Ground

The connections are the same on each of the four channel groups. The calibration enable supports
Kinemetrics ES-U2s, ES-Us, and FBA-11 sensors. [Note: The terminal blocks can also be used to
connect Tri-axial sensors and this is discussed in a separate section.] The Calibration Signal and the
enable pulse are separate connections on J4 (Group 4) (they are common on J1, J2, & J3.) to allow
calibration of Tri-axial sensors but this does not affect the electrical connections or use of the signals
with Uniaxial sensors.

Legacy sensors such as the FBA-1 and FBA-13 require an additional calibration interface box to
produce functional tests with Rock digitizers.

The figure below shows the suggested connection of four ESU-2s using four shielded twisted pair
cable with an overall shield.

Page 33
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Dual Supply Terminal Board (-01 Version)

J1
+OUT 1 CH1+
-OUT Pair 1 2 CH1-
3 CH1GND
CALSIG 4 CAL1-3
CCE Pair 2 5 CENB X
6 PWR_COM1
COM
Pair 3 7 PWR_COM2
+1 2VA 8 +12VA
-1 2VA Pair 4 9 -12VA
10

Dual Supply Sensor


using 4 Shielded CON10
Group Channel 1
Twisted Pairs with PGP
Overall Shield

J2
+OUT 1 CH2+
-OUT Pair 1 2 CH2-
3 CH2GND
CALSIG 4 CAL1-3
CCE Pair 2 5 CENB X
6 PWR_COM1
COM
Pair 3 7 PWR_COM2
+1 2VA 8 +12VA
-1 2VA Pair 4 9 -12VA
10

Dual Supply Sensor


using 4 Shielded CON10
Group Channel 2
Twisted Pairs with PGP
Overall Shield

J3
+OUT 1 CH3+
-OUT Pair 1 2 CH3-
3 CH3GND
CALSIG 4 CAL1-3
CCE Pair 2 5 CENB X
6 PWR_COM1
COM
Pair 3 7 PWR_COM2
+1 2VA 8 +12VA
-1 2VA Pair 4 9 -12VA
10
+3.3VOWS
Dual Supply Sensor OWSD3
using 4 Shielded CON10
Group Channel 3
Twisted Pairs with PGP
Overall Shield

J4
+OUT 1 CH4+
-OUT Pair 1 2 CH4-
3 CH4GND
CALSIG 4 CAL4
CCE Pair 2 5 CENB X
6 PWR_COM1
COM
Pair 3 7 PWR_COM2
+1 2VA 8 +12VA
-1 2VA Pair 4 9 -12VA
10

Dual Supply Sensor


using 4 Shielded CON10
Group Channel 4
Twisted Pairs with PGP
Overall Shield

Page 34
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

The figure below shows the suggested connections to a four shielded pair cable with no overall
shield. Although an overall shield is preferred many structural installations require the use of
plenum rated cable and this figure is compatible with this cabling. It is also compatible with
Kinemetrics 503536 Pigtails used in structural installations with ES-U2s, ES-Us, and FBA-11 sensors.

Dual Supply Terminal Board (-01 Version)

J1
WHITE 1 CH1+
+OUT
-OUT BROWN Pair 1 2 CH1-
3 CH1GND
YELLOW 4 CAL1-3
CALSIG
CCE ORANGE Pair 2 5 CENB X
BLACK 6 PWR_COM1
COM
+1 2VA
RED Pair 3 7 PWR_COM2
VIOLET 8 +12VA
COM
-1 2VA
BLUE Pair 4 9 -12VA
10
Dual Supply Sensor using 4 Shielded
Twisted Pairs also for Plenum Rated CON10
Pigtails such as KMI 503536 Group Channel 1
PGP

J2
WHITE 1 CH2+
+OUT
-OUT BROWN Pair 1 2 CH2-
3 CH2GND
YELLOW 4 CAL1-3
CALSIG
CCE ORANGE Pair 2 5 CENB X
BLACK 6 PWR_COM1
COM
+1 2VA
RED Pair 3 7 PWR_COM2
VIOLET 8 +12VA
COM
-1 2VA
BLUE Pair 4 9 -12VA
10
Dual Supply Sensor using 4 Shielded
Twisted Pairs also for Plenum Rated CON10
Pigtails such as KMI 503536 Group Channel 2
PGP

J3
WHITE 1 CH3+
+OUT
-OUT BROWN Pair 1 2 CH3-
3 CH3GND
YELLOW 4 CAL1-3
CALSIG
CCE ORANGE Pair 2 5 CENB X
BLACK 6 PWR_COM1
COM
+1 2VA
RED Pair 3 7 PWR_COM2
VIOLET 8 +12VA
COM
-1 2VA
BLUE Pair 4 9 -12VA
10
Dual Supply Sensor using 4 Shielded
Twisted Pairs also for Plenum Rated CON10
Pigtails such as KMI 503536 Group Channel 3
PGP

J4
WHITE 1 CH4+
+OUT
-OUT BROWN Pair 1 2 CH4-
3 CH4GND
YELLOW 4 CAL4
CALSIG
CCE ORANGE Pair 2 5 CENB X
BLACK 6 PWR_COM1
COM
+1 2VA
RED Pair 3 7 PWR_COM2
VIOLET 8 +12VA
COM
-1 2VA
BLUE Pair 4 9 -12VA
10
Dual Supply Sensor using 4 Shielded
Twisted Pairs also for Plenum Rated CON10
Pigtails such as KMI 503536 Group Channel 4
PGP

Page 35
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Single Supply Four Channel Terminal Board (-02)


The single supply unit provides a switched power circuit from the input voltage to the Digitizer. This
is the raw input power without any additional regulation so it is important that the sensor can
operate from this voltage and will not be damaged. If the Kinemetrics power supply is used the
nominal voltage will be 15.5V when AC is present and a nominal 12V from an attached valve
regulated lead acid battery (VRLA) when AC power is lost. The power has a 500mA resetting
polymer fuse on the line to limit the current drawn by the sensor. The Calibration Enable Signal is a
5V logic signal with a low of <0.4VDC and a high of >4.4 VDC.

The connections on the Rock Terminal Strip configured for single supply Uniaxial sensors (-02
Version) are shown below. Each terminal strip supports the installation of up to four uniaxial single
supply sensors. To obtain the best high resolution performance we strongly recommend that the
units are configured with differential outputs. A 5V Full Scale Differential Output represents a good
compromise between noise performance and allowable cable length in a structural monitoring
system. The input sensitivity is software configurable within the Granite.

Page 36
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

The connections are the same on each of the four channel groups (J1,J2,J3,J4). The Calibration
Signal and the enable pulse are separate connections on J4 (Group 4) (they are common on J1, J2, &
J3.) to allow calibration of Tri-axial sensors but this does not affect the electrical connections or use
of the signals with Uniaxial sensors. The figure below shows the suggested connection of four single
supply ESU-2s using four shielded twisted pair cable with an overall shield and with four twisted
pairs only. (Note only single supply ES-U2s manufactured after December 2009 should be used with
the Rock 15.5VDC supply older ES-U2s and ES-Us should use a regulated 12V supplied either to the
Digitizer or separately to the sensor.)

-02 VERSION, 12 PIN CONNECTORS INSTALLED

J2
+OUT 1 Channel Positiv e Input
-OUT Pair 1 2 Channel Negativ e Input
3 Channel Ground
CALSIG 4 Calibration Signal
1843680

CCE Pair 2 5 Calibration Enable


COM 6 Isolated Signal Ground (ADC)
DC-DC- Pair 3 7 Sy stem Power Return
8 Sy stem Power to Sensor
DC-DC+
Pair 4 9 Sy stem Power to Sensor
10
11 One Wire Power
SINGLE SUPPLY SENSOR 12 One Wire Data
W/ 4-PAIR CABLE AND
Group Channel X
OVERALL SHIELD Case & Shield Ground
CON12

J8
+OUT 1 Channel Positiv e Input
-OUT Pair 1 2 Channel Negativ e Input
3 Channel Ground
CALSIG 4 Calibration Signal
1843680

CCE Pair 2 5 Calibration Enable


COM 6 Isolated Signal Ground (ADC)
DC-DC- Pair 3 7 Sy stem Power Return
8 Sy stem Power to Sensor
DC-DC+
Pair 4 9 Sy stem Power to Sensor
10
11 One Wire Power
SINGLE SUPPLY SENSOR 12 One Wire Data
W/ 4-PAIR CABLE
Group Channel X
CON12 Case & Shield Ground

Wiring Terminal Boards


The terminal boards consist of fixed terminal blocks on the board and removable plugs with
identification labels. Removing these plugs while completing the wiring makes this much easier. It
also allows the digitizer to be removed or replaced without disconnecting all the wiring! Make all
connections by stripping ~1/2" of insulation from each wire and neatly twisting the bare copper
strands together. Then, insert each wire into the terminals at the correct location and tighten the
screw. The terminal plugs can then be-reinserted into the correct location on the terminal board.

Page 37
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Connecting ES-Ts and Tri-axial Sensors to Terminal Boards


Tri-axial units should be connected to terminal boards in one of the configuration described in the
previous sections. With a Triaxial unit the first channel to be connected should be used to make the
additional connections including the power, calibration signal, and calibration control. When
connecting the fourth (or second) tri-axial unit to a 12 channel group the first channel connects to
physical channel 4 for the signal, power, calibration signal, and calibration control. Thus two triaxial
sensors are powered from the first Terminal Boards ADC. (The -01 Options 2 Watt converter
provides sufficient power for two ES-Ts configured as 5V differential output sensors.) The
remaining two sensors are powered from the second and third four channel group.

Functional Test Sequence


The functional test feature sends a calibration sequence from the digitizer to the sensor. The size,
duration and shape of the resulting record depend on several factors, including the sensor type,
sensitivity, and voltage range as well as the particular sensor script selected.

For example, a 4g EpiSensor ES-T or a Basalt with a 4g internal deck set for a +/-5V range will produce
the following calibration result using the EpiSensorFS calibration script:

Page 38
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

The duration of the calibration sequence also depends on several factors. In this example, the duration
of the test record will be set primarily by the calibration script (20 seconds for the EpiSensorFS script),
plus the pre-event and post-event time (3 seconds and 10 seconds respectively in this example), plus
one second. This gives a total expected record duration of 34 seconds (20+3+10+1).

General Sensor Interfacing Considerations


The following general considerations apply to connecting sensors to Rock digitizers:

Analog Inputs
The inputs to the Rock digitizers are differential inputs with a nominal 102.4k differential input
impedance they can be configured via the software for three input ranges:

1) 20V Peak (40 Vpp) differential input Signal Swings from +10V on +Input and -10V on Input to -
10V on +Input and +10V on Input. This range is compatible with most Broadband
Seismometers and ES-T sensors set with a high gain differential output.
2) 5V Peak (10Vpp) differential input Signal Swings from +2.5V on +Input and -2.5V on Input to -
2.5V on +Input and +2.5V on Input. This range is compatible with ES-Us, ES-U2s and ES-T
sensors set with a low gain differential output. It represents a good compromise for structural
monitoring systems.
3) 2.5V Peak (5Vpp) differential input Signal Swings from +1.25V on +Input and -1.25V on Input
to -1.25V on +Input and +1.25V on Input. This range will work with older generation single
ended 2.5V output sensors such as FBA-11s, FBA-23s and EpiSensors that cannot be easily re-
configured. This range can also be used to provide a x8 pre-amplifier function for sensors with a
20V Peak output.

As the unit has a differential input it can accommodate a common mode signal on the inputs. The
common mode signal has a 1 M resistor on each lead to the system ground to tie floating systems
to the correct operating range. Common mode voltages should generally be kept to no more than a
few volts so as not to limit the input signal levels.

Calibrator Output
The Rock Digitizers have an individual calibrator system on each of their ADC/DSP boards. The
calibrator output is provided as a +/-2.5V single ended signal generated from a 16 bit DAC. The
output voltage is calibrated during the factory set up with a digital scale factor to accurately produce
+/-2.5V at the Full Scale DAC setting. The output current is limited to 5mA at 2.5V and the voltage
output passes through a 40 resistor to prevent overload if the calibration output is accidentally
shorted. The calibration signal is only applied to the external lines when the appropriate calibration
relay is enabled; this prevents unwanted interactions from occurring with sensors when calibration
is not active. On a four channel board two relay calibration output connections are provided. The
first is for channels 1, 2, and 3, while a separate connection is provided for channel 4 calibration.
This allows a passive (moving coil) seismometer to be connected to channel 4 and calibrated
separately from a three channel active sensor connected to channels 1, 2, and 3 and for different
calibration sequences to be applied to the two sensors. It also allows calibration signals to be driven

Page 39
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

to two ES-Ts connected to one calibrator by staggering the calibrations. The DAC can be
programmed to provide:

Simple Pulses
Sine waves of a given frequency and amplitude
Pseudo Random White Noise
Pseudo Random Binary Sequences

Control Signals
The calibrator can also control up to four logical outputs that can be used to control the calibration
enable and other sensor control lines. For example the mass re-centering or locking control lines on
a broad band seismometer. The four sensor control bits are standard ACT CMOS outputs driving
between 0 and 5.1V with a current of up to 24mA the low level will be <0.4V and the high level
>4.4V. The active state to enable the cal coil in the EpiSensor, for example is logic 1 or high at about
~5V. There are 830 ohm resistors in series with the outputs for short circuit protection.

Calibration Control and Calibration Scripts


The functions described above are programmed by individual low level commands sent to control
the various relays, control bits, or DAC. These commands have been written into individual
calibration scripts that are selected for each channel group for the most commonly used sensors. If
you wish to write your own script or connect a sensor that does not have a calibration script contact
Kinemetrics.

Calibration Signals when using four EpiSensors on a 12-Channel Group.


When four triaxial EpiSensors ES-Ts are connected to a 12 channel group the fourth ES-T receives its
power and calibration signals from the Channel 4 physical connection. It is important that the unit is
configured so that the calibration sequence is applied first to the sensor connected to Channel 1, 2,
and 3 and then to the sensor connected to Channel 4. This is because an individual DAC cannot
apply sufficient current to the calibration coils of 6 EpiSensor axes at the same time. Instead the
calibration is applied to the ES-T on Physical Channel 4 after the other three have received the
calibration signal. This is set in the System Operation section of the web interface by selecting
EpiSensor-4on3 for each sensor group and applying the changes to the unit.

This same approach should be used for four EpiSensors connected sequentially on a terminal board.
In this case the second sensor receives its calibration from the Channel 4 Physical connection. And
the calibration sequence will show sensors 1, 3 and 4 with a calibration pulse followed by sensor 2.
Again this is set in the System Operation section of the web interface by selecting EpiSensor-4on3
for each sensor group and applying the changes to the unit.

Page 40
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Connecting the Optional External Battery

WARNING! Fire or explosion hazard. Do not install a non-rechargeable battery to be charged by


the unit. Only install a sealed lead acid battery with specifications compatible with those above. Other
types of Lead Acid battery should not be used as the temperature corrected charging voltage is set for
SLA batteries only. On no account install an alternative battery chemistry such as Lithium Ion or Nickel
Metal Hydride!

If you store a Sealed Lead Acid (SLA) battery, you should still charge it every six to nine months to
prevent permanent loss of capacity. You can float-charge the battery at 13.5-13.8V or cycle-charge the
battery, provided the current is limited appropriately and the voltage to less than 14.7V. When the
voltage reaches 14.7V, the battery will be damaged unless you convert the cycle charging to float
charging. Kinemetrics ships batteries fully charged; make sure a battery is still fully charged before
installing it.

Battery Installation
Follow the instructions below to install the external battery.

WARNING! Burn or explosion hazard. Never place metallic objects (such as a screwdriver or your
wristwatch strap) across the terminals of a battery. The metal terminals can get very hot. Handle
batteries with care, and do not drop them or attempt to take them apart. Recycle used batteries, or
dispose of them in accordance with local regulations. Do not throw used batteries onto a fire.

Caution: Before installing the new battery make sure it is fully charged. If the battery is uncharged,
the unit will charge it, but this can take some time and if AC power is lost, the units power
autonomy will be reduced.
To install an external battery:

1. Ensure the power cable is disconnected from all power sources and the unit.
2. Connect the negative terminal of the battery to the black wire.
3. Connect the positive terminal of the battery to the red wire.
4. Connect the power cable to the power connector on the unit and ensure the unit turns on under
battery power.
5. Proceed to connect the PSA and check that the unit switches to this power source.

NOTE: An external battery should not be used with a system powered by a Power
Over Ethernet (POE) connection.

Page 41
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Connecting the Power Supply

The unit optionally includes a wide-input DC power supply assembly which connects to a standard AC
outlet. Some Granite systems are shipped with External Charging systems that are provided with
separate operating instructions.

Caution: Using the wrong power supply unit with the unit can permanently damage its circuit boards.
Do not attach any power supply assembly to the digitizer other than the one supplied by Kinemetrics
unless it exactly matches the voltage and current ratings required for the digitizer. Older Altus power
supplies are not compatible with Rock digitizers.
Before plugging in the PSA:

Make sure that the AC outlet is properly wired.


Find out if the local AC power is subject to interruption, brownouts, or spikes. If it is, plug a
suitable surge suppresser into the AC outlet. (Strongly recommended!)

Then do the following:

1. Plug the PSA into the AC power outlet or surge suppressor. (Users outside the U.S. must
use an adapter or an appropriate IEC line cord with the correct AC plug.)
2. Push the 12-socket power connector into the digitizer's POWER & BATTERY connector
and twist the rotating shell until it locks.

NOTE: The PSA automatically adjusts for line voltages from 90 to 260 VAC (either 50 or
60Hz) without user intervention.

Connect a laptop or equivalent to the console port

The digitizer should now be connected to a Laptop or PC using the console port. (A serial to USB
connector may be required.) The initial set-up of the device can now be performed over this serial link
as described in the Initial Setup in the next section.

Page 42
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Basic Operation
The digitizer can operate stand-alone, requiring only power and sensors to operate. Beyond these
basics, if you provide a GPS antenna connection for accurate timing and a network connection, then the
digitizer really is able to provide tremendous additional capabilities. The digitizer is designed for use with
a network, and will serve you best in that environment. This section describes how to set up the Digitizer
and perform the basic operations.

Initial Setup
Initial setup of the digitizer is done using a console cable. This connects the digitizers RS-232 console
connection to your computer so that you can do preliminary setup. Once done, the console cable will
rarely be used, so a single console cable is usually sufficient to maintain a large number of digitizers.

You'll also need a PC or equivalent running a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal or
PuTTY on Windows or minicom on Linux.

You may need to use a USB to serial adapter if your PC does not have an available COM port. If so, install
the software and then plug in the adapter, making note of the COM port assigned to the port.

Kinemetrics includes the PuTTY application as an alternative to using HyperTerminal on Windows, or if


you are using an Operating System (such as Windows Vista) that does not supply HyperTerminal. Please
see the Tools section that includes a basic description of PuTTY setup and operation.

You should set up your RS-232 communication software (such as HyperTerminal) for 38400 baud, no
flow control, no parity, 1 stop bit. After power on, you should be able to get a login prompt from the
digitizer. Initially log into the system with the username root and the password kmi. You are now
logged on to the Linux operating system on the Rock.

Network Address

The first thing that youll need to do is to set (or determine) the network address of the digitizer. You
need to do this even if your digitizer will not normally be connected to a network. Network access is
needed to retrieve files even if you need to retrieve them manually and locally.

If you are unfamiliar with TCP/IP networking, we suggest you review the IP Primer section.

At this point the Ethernet connection should be connected to your network. If the Ethernet link lights do
not appear, give the following commands to start the Ethernet interface:

[root@GRANITE:~]# ifdown a

[root@GRANITE:~]# ifup -a

Page 43
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

The digitizer is configured at the factory for DHCP. This means that it expects to get its network address
from a network server, which can be a local LAN or can be your Internal Service Provider. If you plan to
use DHCP in regular operation, then you only need to know the IP address assigned by DHCP. You can
find this out by typing:

[root@GRANITE:~]# ipaddr eth0

10.0.1.153

The IP address is also shown in the sysinfo display as shown below.

If you need to specify an IP address, then once logged into the console, use the NETCONFIG script.

In either case, make a note of the current IP address. You will need it later.

The digitizer can also act as a DHCP Server, which can be useful if you will occasionally connect to a
standalone digitizer with something like a laptop computer. See the section on Non-networked Use.

See the section Non-networked Use if you dont intend your digitizer to normally be connected to a
network.

Viewing System Information

Use the sysinfo command to view System Information:

[root@GRANITE:~]# sysinfo

Hostname: GRANITE

Unit Tag No: 288

Int Temp C: 28.75

Int Humidity: 21.32

Voltage: 15.329

Amperes: 0.120

Watts : 1.839

OS Time: Thu Mar 6 21:16:43 UTC 2008

PSU Time: Thu Mar 6 21:16:44 2008

Up-Time: 21:16:43 up 1:20, 1 user,

load average: 0.03, 0.07, 0.08

eth0 IP Addr: 10.0.1.153

Page 44
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

eth1 IP Addr: N/A

Services Up: cron inetd ntpd sshd

Via inetd: telnet ftp

MemFree: 195080 kB

SwapFree: 65528 kB

Filesystem Size Used Avail Use% Mounted on (Linux 2.4)

/dev/hda1 1.0G 289M 672M 30% /

/dev/hda2 3.0G 184M 2.6G 7% /opt

/dev/mmca1 62M 14k 61M 1% /mnt/sd

Or

Filesystem Size Used Avail Use% Mounted on (Linux 2.6)

rootfs 1.1G 625M 390M 62% /

/dev/sda2 6.9G 2.8G 3.8G 43% /opt

Use the versions command to view the major software versions:

[root@GRANITE:~]# versions

KMI Rock initrd 2.1.2

KMI Rock IBM J9 JVM 2.1-kmi.1

KMI Rock Kernel, build: Feb 7 2008, 08:27:49

KMI Rock PSU PSVersion=5.00

KMI Rock Software Base 1.0

KMI Rock filesystem 2.1.0

KMI Rock filesystem 2.1.0 Update 3 (beta-25)

KMI Rockhound 2.5.5

Page 45
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

The Web Interface

The web interface to the digitizer allows you to configure and operate your digitizer using a web
browser without installing any Kinemetrics-specific software. The web browser should be HTML 1.1
compliant (or later), support frames, and should support Java and Java applets.

See Overview of the Web Interface.

Basic Setup
Although Kinemetrics makes every effort to make the digitizer useful out of the box, there are some
items that must be set because they depend on how you will use your system and what sensors will be
attached.

The parameter configuration described here is done using the web interface. It can also be done using
the RockTalk program through the network or through a Modem Only connection.

Page 46
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Sensor Groups

The digitizers physical channels are organized into groups of 4 channels each. Each group is capable of
supporting different sensor types, so you must select the types of sensors which will be used within each
group. Selecting the physical channels and sample rates defines the virtual channels that will be used in
most of the rest of the system. This is accessed through the System Operation parameters for the Rock
Data Interface:

After completing your changes, be sure to press OK to save your changes.

Page 47
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Voltage Ranges

Next, you must set up the voltage ranges. The digitizer is capable of supporting sensor input voltage
ranges of +/-2.5V, +/-5.0V, and +/-20V. This selection must be made for every virtual channel, and is
made in the Hardware parameters section:

NOTE: Input Voltage Ranges always cause confusion! As the input to digitizers is
normally differential so this is what each voltage range represents:

+/-2.5V Range The + Input Swings from +1.25 to -1.25 V as the Input Swings from -1.25V to +1.25V, the Sensor thus swings
from +2.5V to -2.5V this is sometimes referred to as +/-2.5Vpeak Differential or 5Vpp (Peak to Peak) Differential. This range can
be used with single ended +/-2.5Vpeak sensors, such as older generation Force Balance sensors.

+/-5V Range The + Input Swings from +2.5 to -2.5 V as the Input Swings from -2.5V to +2.5V, the Sensor thus swings from
+5V to -5V this is sometimes referred to as +/-5Vpeak Differential or 10Vpp Differential. This range is recommended for use in
structural monitoring systems with EpiSensors configured for a +/-5V peak differential output.

+/-20V Range The + Input Swings from +10 to -10 V as the Input Swings from -10V to +10V, the Sensor thus swings from
+20V to -20V this is sometimes referred to as +/-20Vpeak Differential or 40Vpp Differential. This range is used by the majority
of Broadband sensors and offers the highest resolution performance from the Rock Digitizer.

NOTE: Basalt Internal Deck. The +/-5V Range is used for the standard +/-2g range. In
order to operate the unit with an effective +/-1g range, set the voltage range to +/-
2.5V. (Basalts can be ordered with an optional 4g/2g Full Scale Range in which case
the +/-5V Range is used for the standard +/-4g range and the +/-2.5V range would be
used for the +/-2g range.)

There are always 24 bits of ADC resolution, so it would break down like this:

Range ADC counts uV/ct


2.5 8388608 0.298923223

5.0 8388608 0.596046447

20.0 8388608 2.384185791

Conversion of the channel data to Engineering units further requires that you know the "sensitivity"
value, which is the sensor's conversion of Volts/g. This conversion is done as

counts/8388608*FullScale/Sensitivity

So for example:

Full scale = 20V

Page 48
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Sensitivity = 10V/g (2g sensor)


Counts = 2097152 (one-quarter scale)
Value in g = 2097152/8388608*20/10 = 0.5g

After completing your changes, be sure to press OK to save your changes.

Page 49
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Sensitivity

The Sensitivity parameter defines the voltage sensitivity of the sensor. The sensitivity value is normally
seen as a Volts per g value, and is related to the Voltage range. For example, if your voltage range is
+/-20V, and you have 4g sensors (a range of +/-4g), then the sensitivity is 5V/g. This selection must be
made for every virtual channel, and is made on the Hardware parameters section:

NOTE: Basalt Internal Deck. Regardless of the voltage range setting, the sensitivity
should be set according to the Internal Deck's configuration sheet in V/g. (Nominally
1.25V/g for a 4g sensor, 2.5V/g for a 2g sensor)

After completing your changes, be sure to press OK to save your changes.

Page 50
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Basalt Internal Deck Zero Adjustment

Generally, as the sensors are zeroed at the factory, and if the unit has been leveled, zero adjustment will
probably not be required. If required you can zero the accelerometers by using the waveform viewer in
the web interface to monitor the offsets as you manually adjust them. Generally if the offset is less than
50mV (62.5mG) zeroing is not required. If adjustment is required proceed as detailed below.

Adjustment Instructions
Ensure the unit is operating and you are connected to the unit using the Web Interface.
Start the Waveform Viewer to display the mean voltages of the EpiSensor channels in millivolts.
As shown:

Page 51
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

If adjustment is required remove the adjustment hole screw as shown in the figure below. The
top adjustment hole adjust the Z Axis (Vertical), the hole in the back adjusts the N Axis (North),
while the hole on the right side adjusts the E Axis (East).

Caution: The screw on the left hand cover of the unit is not an adjustment hole. Do not remove
this screw and do not insert the adjustment tool into this hole as your unit will be severely
damaged and significant fault currents can flow in the tool!
The drawing above shows where to insert the adjustment tool (KMI P/N 112015) for each EpiSensor
channel. As the figure indicates, the vertical module produces a positive output when the
adjustment screw is turned clockwise, the horizontal modules produce a negative output when the
adjustment screw is turned clockwise. Monitor this with the Waveform Viewer remember that
there is some response latency in the Viewer.

When the channel is adjusted, gently remove the tool.


After adjusting all the channels, replace the screws carefully to ensure the sealing washers are
not damaged.
Important: Give the cover a moderate tap with a screwdriver handle after replacing the screws.
The adjustment screws can have a residual stress that may cause an offset in data during a large
earthquake. Tapping it will eliminate the residual stress.
Check that the sensors are still zeroed.

Page 52
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Other Channel Parameters

Many other channel parameters listed in the Hardware parameters section are notational only, meaning
that they are included in telemetry and output file information (depending on the formats used), but
have no direct effect on the data itself. Notational parameters include Channel ID, Sensor Type, Sensor
SN, Natural Frequency, Damping, Gain, Altitude, Azimuth, Offsets North, East, and Up, Location Code,
Network Code, etc. Remember that these values are defined for each virtual channel.

After completing your changes, be sure to press OK to save your changes.

Physical vs. Virtual Channels

It is important to understand the difference between physical and virtual channels. There is a physical
set of sensor inputs coming into the digitizer, and virtual channels that represent a physical channel at a
specified sample rate. The digitizer can produce more virtual channels than it physically has as inputs.
For example, a four channel unit could be configured in the following ways:

Example 1. Produce a virtual channel corresponding to each physical channel:

Physical Virtual
1 1 Physical 1 at 100sps
2 2 Physical 2 at 100sps
3 3 Physical 3 at 100sps
4 4 Physical 4 at 100sps
Example 2. Produce data from one channel at multiple sample rates:

Physical Virtual
1 1 Physical 1 at 10sps
1 2 Physical 1 at 20sps
1 3 Physical 1 at 50sps
1 4 Physical 1 at 100sps
Example 3. Produce data from each physical channel at multiple sample rates:

Physical Virtual
1 1 Physical 1 at 10sps
1 2 Physical 1 at 100sps
2 3 Physical 2 at 10sps
2 4 Physical 2 at 100sps
3 5 Physical 3 at 10sps
3 6 Physical 3 at 100sps
4 7 Physical 4 at 10sps
4 8 Physical 4 at 100sps

Page 53
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

You select the sample rates and the produced sample rates on the System Operation parameters for
each channel, also called Channel Mapping:

After completing your changes, be sure to press OK to save your changes.

NOTE: To define more virtual channels, you must rebuild the layout to allow for more
channel as shown in section Adding Channels.

State-of-Health Streams

In addition to the sensor input channels discussed above, the system can produce several State-of-
Health streams (also called SOH). These can include such things as system voltages, temperature,
humidity, current, and time quality. These streams are produced at 1sps, so to record them; youll need
a data format that can record data to 1sps. The SOH streams are selected in the System Operation
parameters, just below the Channel Mapping.

After completing your changes, be sure to press OK to save your changes.

Page 54
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Trigger Levels

Trigger levels are the level at which the system will decide that a channel is triggered and that it should
contribute that channels votes toward triggering the entire system. By default, the system uses
threshold triggers, which are set as a percentage of full scale. So if your full scale range is +/-20V and
your threshold is set to 2%, then your trigger level is 2% of 20V, or 0.4V. Trigger levels are set in the
System Operation parameters:

Please note that the trigger levels and votes apply to virtual channels.

After completing your changes, be sure to press OK to save your changes.

Page 55
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Voting Options

There are two different Voters available in the system. The first is the traditional Voter used in previous
generation Altus digitizers, and the other is the CGS Voter that works similarly to the standard Voter, but
differs in how detriggering is done.

In either Voter, a channel is considered triggered if it has filtered data values that exceed the specified
level specified for that channel. Correspondingly, a channel is considered detriggered if NO values
exceed the specified level.

Note that the levels used change depending on whether the system as a whole is triggered or not. If the
system is not triggered, the filtered data values are compared against the TRIGGER levels, whereas once
the system has been triggered they are compared against the DETRIGGER levels.

The standard Voter counts triggers and uses that count to determine detriggering by comparing
votes with the detrigger voting threshold. If the number of votes of triggered channels do not
exceed the detrigger threshold, then the system will detrigger. Exceeding the detrigger
threshold will cause the system to remain triggered.
With this Voter, the system detriggers when not enough channels exceed the trigger threshold
(number of votes) to maintain the trigger.
The CGS Voter works differently in that it requires that each channel contribute enough
detrigger votes to exceed the detrigger voting threshold. If the number of detrigger votes do not
exceed the threshold, the system remains triggered. If the number of detrigger votes exceeds
the detrigger threshold, then the system will detrigger.
With this Voter, the channels accumulate detrigger votes when they fall below the detrigger
level. The system will detrigger when enough detrigger votes accumulate that the number of
detrigger votes exceeds to votes needed to detrigger the system.

Page 56
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Other Parameters

Other basic parameters that are worth reviewing are:

Voter parameters
Digitizer pre-event and post-event times
Channel trigger and detrigger votes

After completing your changes, be sure to press OK to save your changes.

Activating Parameter Changes

Once you have completed your parameter changes, activate the completed parameter changes by
selecting Apply Changes Now from the left pane of the display.

Passwords

All digitizers are shipped with the same default passwords. Before deployment, Kinemetrics
recommends that you change all passwords to something meaningful to you and make a record of all
passwords assigned for later reference. Default passwords are assigned as follows:

Linux:

root : kmi
kmi : kmi
admin : kmi
client : kmi

Rockhound:

Console: kmi
Web service: rock : kmi
You should also review the enabled IP services to make certain that the services are enabled that you
need and want. For example, do you want FTP, TELNET, and other services enabled?

Page 57
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Save Parameters

Once youve configured Rockhound for how you intend to operate your system, you should save your
configuration. This saved copy of the parameters will be used to restore the Rockhound parameters in
case they become corrupted. This is done in two ways:

From a Linux login, use the command rhsave to save a copy of your parameters within the
system that can be restored in case your parameters become corrupted. This is done as follows:
cd /usr/rock/SMARTSDist/bin
./rhsave
If the units configuration is destroyed, the system will revert to the copy of the configuration
most recently saved by rhsave, or to the factory default if the configuration was never saved
using rhsave.

From the web interface use the Advanced Features function Administrative Details to download
a copy of the parameters to your PC. At the top of the Administrative Details screen, there is a
link Click Here to Download Parameters, from the instrument.
Kinemetrics recommends that you save a copy of your Rockhound parameters any time that you
make significant changes to the parameters so that you can quickly restore them in the event of
loss.
See Saving and Restoring Parameters

Triggered Recording
Pre-Event Time

The setting allows you to determine how many seconds of data before the trigger criteria were met will
be recorded in the event file. For strong motion applications this is normally set to a few seconds so you
can determine the noise before the start of the event. The factory default is ten seconds.

For weak motion recording, especially if you expect the system to be triggered on the S-waves, the
situation is more complex. In this case, the pre-event should be sufficiently long to allow any P-waves
from an event within the region of interest to be recorded. This time can be estimated by the travel
times of the P and S waves from the most distant point of interest. The difference between these times,
with some allowance for a true pre-event time, gives the setting for the pre-event time.

Post Event Time

The post event time determines how many seconds after the system has de-triggered will be recorded in
the file. It also determines how likely events are to be split into separate files. This is because if the
system re-triggers during the post event the file will just be extended. If the post event is set too short,
several files could be created from the same event. We set the factory default at ten seconds, which is a
reasonable value for strong motion recording. For weak motion recording this time should be set
according to the goals of the study. Generally, a time of 30 seconds or more should be considered.

Page 58
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Minimum Run Time

This is the minimum time the recorder will record once an event is triggered. Formerly, it was used to
ensure a complete sequence of time code was recorded with the event, but this is not required
anymore. Generally, the pre-event and post-event now give sufficient control over the event timing. For
this reason we set the factory default to zero seconds.

Channel Triggering

Although you will need to read most sections to determine what is appropriate for your application, we
have split the triggering system into two sections. If you are just interested in recording "strong motion"
events when the ground or structure shakes significantly, you will find instructions on setting triggers in
the Triggering for Strong Motion Recording section. If you are interested in recording weak events that
are very close to the local seismic noise, you should read Triggering and Recording Weak Motion
Applications. After you read the relevant section you will be able to set up each channels triggering
appropriately for your application.

Triggering in Strong Motion Applications


For strong motion recording you will want to record the strongest motion from an earthquake that
can be felt and possibly cause damage to buildings and other structures. Normally, a simple
threshold trigger will be sufficient to reliably trigger the recorder. As these are sensitive instruments,
it is also possible to record much weaker motions using the threshold trigger. The tradeoff to
consider is how you will retrieve the data and how to ensure that there will be room for the "big
one" if you have very sensitive threshold trigger levels.

The threshold trigger has two parameters for each channel. The first is the threshold trigger, which
is the level in percent of full scale that causes the channel to trigger. The default value for this is 2%.
The second parameter is the threshold de-trigger. This is the value in percent of full scale the signal
must fall below after triggering for the channel to detrigger. The default value is 2%. The detrigger
parameter can be used for extending the recording time by setting it to a smaller value than the
threshold trigger value.

Alarms
The recorder has an additional set of thresholds called alarm threshold parameters. These are
specified as a percentage of the full-scale input and can be set independently for each channel. They
are set in the channel trigger parameters window. When a channels triggered filtered data exceeds
this threshold, the hardware alarm is activated.

Page 59
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Triggering in Weak Motion Applications


The recorder includes the following features for use in seismological applications:

Three different trigger filters that allow the trigger band of interest to be optimized.
STA/LTA triggering to support the recording of small amplitude events.
The use of these specific features is discussed below.

Trigger Filters
Your selection of a pre-trigger filter is determined by your application, by seismic noise conditions at
the site, and by the type of sensors installed with the recorder. The pre-trigger filter pass-band
should encompass the maximum energy of expected seismic events. The filter you select should
have a pass-band that doesnt coincide with the peak frequency components of seismic noise at the
site, thus discriminating against seismic noise.

Typical trigger filter response

The frequency response function of the seismic sensor modifies event and noise signals and thus is
an important factor in your choice. If the frequency content of events and of seismic noise occur in
the same frequency band, the trigger filter will be inefficient.

Page 60
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

The recorder has three band-pass filters with different low- and high-corner frequencies. Note that
the corner frequencies scale according to the sampling rate. Some examples are as follows:

An IIR-A filter with a 100 Hz sampling rate can record regional events with broadband sensors.
Its 0.6 Hz low-corner frequency gives some protection to the dominant component of natural
marine seismic noise. Its high-corner frequency gives protection against excessive high-
frequency man-made seismic noise.
An IIR-A filter with a sampling rate of 200 or 250 Hz can monitor local earthquakes with efficient
protection against marine noise.
The classic strong motion filter at a sampling rate of 200 Hz or 250 Hz is used in typical strong
motion applications.
The low-frequency corner of a classic strong motion filter at a sampling rate of 100 Hz can be
used for far-regional and tele-seismic applications. It has good protection against 20 - 40 Hz
man-made seismic noise in urban areas.
The classic strong motion filter at a 250 Hz sampling rate can record for short periods with a
short-period seismometer. In this case, the sensor itself protects against ~0.3 Hz marine seismic
noise.
An IIR-C filter at a 200 or 250 Hz sampling rate can monitor local earthquakes. However, there is
no protection against high-frequency man-made noise because the frequency content of the
events and the noise is approximately the same.
The approximate band-pass of these filters is shown in the table below.

Trigger types and sampling rates

Trigger Type 20 SPS 40 SPS 50 SPS


IIR-A ~ 0.12-2 Hz ~ 0.24-4 Hz ~ 0.3-5 Hz
Classic Strong Motion ~ 0.01-1.25 Hz ~ 0.02-2.5 Hz ~ 0.025-3.125 Hz
IIR-C ~ 0.2-4 Hz ~ 0.4-8 Hz ~ 0.5-10 Hz
Trigger Type 100 SPS 200 SPS 250 SPS
IIR-A ~0.6-10Hz ~1.2-20Hz ~1.5-25Hz
Classic Strong Motion ~0.05-6.25Hz ~0.1-12.5Hz ~0.12-15Hz
IIR-C ~1-20Hz ~2-40Hz ~2.5-50Hz

Page 61
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

STA/LTA Triggering
The short-time average/long-time average (STA/LTA) trigger algorithm generally increases the
sensitivity of the recorder in comparison to the amplitude threshold trigger algorithm. It improves
the earthquake triggers/false triggers ratio, and, to some extent allows discrimination among the
different types of earthquakes.

This can minimize the work of analysts and allows more efficient use of the recorders data memory.
Therefore, STA/LTA triggering is used most often in weak motion applications that try to record as
many seismic events as possible. The STA/LTA trigger parameter settings are always a tradeoff
among several seismological and instrumental considerations the highest possible trigger
sensitivity for a given type of earthquakes (including "all earthquakes") at a tolerable number of
false triggers.

STA/LTA triggering is most beneficial at seismically quiet sites where natural seismic noise (marine
noise) is the dominant type of seismic noise.

STA/LTA triggering is also effective in cases of suddenly changing man-made seismic noise (like the
noise due to day/night variation of human activity in or close to an urban area). The STA/LTA
algorithm is less effective in the presence of irregular, high amplitude man-made seismic noise that
is often of the burst and/or spike type.

How STA/LTA Works


The STA/LTA algorithm continuously follows the changes in seismic noise over time, and
automatically adjusts recorder sensitivity to give you optimal sensitivity to the actual seismic noise
level at a specific time. This results in significantly higher sensitivity during seismically quiet periods.

The STA/LTA algorithm calculates average absolute amplitude of a seismic signal in two time
windows a Short Time Average window (STA) and a Long Time Average window (LTA). The short
time average window (STA) "watches" for earthquakes and measures the "instant" amplitude of the
seismic signals. The long time average window (LTA) takes care of the average value of seismic noise
during the same period of time. A ratio of both values the STA/LTA ratio is continuously
calculated and, if it exceeds the preset STA/LTA trigger threshold level, a channel trigger is declared.
The channel de-triggers if the STA/LTA ratio falls below another pre-set value the STA/LTA de-
trigger threshold level.

STA/LTA trigger ratio calculations are calculated according to the steps in the figure below. All
calculations are made for every data sample in every channel in the recorder, assuring minimal time
delay between the seismic event and the triggering.

Page 62
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Simplified flowchart of STA/LTA calculations

STA/LTA Parameters
To set the STA/LTA trigger algorithm, adjust the following parameters:

STA window duration in seconds


LTA window duration in seconds
STA/LTA trigger threshold level
STA/LTA de-trigger threshold level

Page 63
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Adjusting STA/LTA Trigger Parameters


The STA/LTA trigger parameter settings depend on the goals of the application, seismic
noise conditions, and the properties of earthquake signals at a given location. Each
seismic site requires detailed study, and only experience will enable you to determine
optimal trigger settings.

In general, by proper adjustments of the STA and LTA duration, you can make triggering
more or less sensitive to certain type of earthquakes, and less sensitive to the type of
seismic noise at a given site.

Short Time Average Window (STA) Duration


The short time average window (STA) duration works as a kind of filter. The shorter it is,
the more sensitive the STA/LTA trigger will be too short and high frequency signals of
local earthquakes. It will also be less sensitive to distant earthquakes. The longer the
STA duration, the less sensitive the trigger will be for short local earthquakes. By
changing the STA duration you can prioritize to some extent between distant or local
events.

On the other hand, by increasing the duration of the STA window, for example,
triggering becomes less sensitive to the common spike-type of man-made seismic noise,
and vice versa.

For regional events, a typical initial value of STA duration is 1 second, for local events
shorter values of around 0.3 s are most commonly used.

Long Time Average Window (LTA) Duration


By setting the LTA window, you can make recording more or less sensitive to regional
events with typically slowly emergent onset waves. In the case of a short LTA duration,
you allow the LTA value to follow the slowly increasing amplitude of emergent seismic
waves and this results in a decreased STA/LTA ratio at the moment when the S waves
arrive, thus reducing trigger sensitivity. In the opposite case, using a longer LTA
duration, the sensitivity to emergent earthquakes will increase because
the STA/LTA ratio will not be influenced so rapidly by the emergent seismic signal.

On the other hand, a short LTA will adjust recorder sensitivity to relatively fast changes
in "continuous" man-made seismic noise during night-to-day transitions of activity in
urban areas. Natural seismic noise (marine noise) changes much more slowly and
therefore much longer LTA durations can be used.

An LTA duration of 60 seconds is a good initial value. A shorter LTA duration is needed to
exclude emergent regional events or to reject changing man-made noise at the site.

Page 64
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

The recorder has a modified version of a "frozen" long time average window (LTA)
during events. The LTA value is, to the first approximation, not allowed to change
(increase) during an event. This prevents truncation of coda waves due to the LTA
increasing too rapidly during events (and thus decreasing STA/LTA ratio too rapidly).
However, this "freezing" is not complete, allowing the trigger algorithm to prevent the
unit from being permanently triggered by a rapid increase in seismic noise.

STA/LTA Trigger Threshold Level


The optimal STA/LTA trigger threshold ratio depends mainly on seismic noise conditions
at the site. Higher noise levels, particularly the man-made kind, require higher values.
Higher values result in fewer false triggers but miss more earthquakes. Lower STA/LTA
triggers make the station more sensitive but cause more false triggers to be recorded.
False triggers and missed events are an unavoidable reality when recording seismic
signals in event triggered mode.

An initial setting of 4 for the STA/LTA ratio is common for relatively quiet seismic sites.
Higher values of 8 and above are required at less favorable sites where man-made
seismic noise is present.

STA/LTA De-Trigger Threshold Level


The STA/LTA de-trigger threshold level (along with the post-event time parameter)
determines when the recording will terminate. The de-trigger threshold is determined
through a selectable STA/LTA de-trigger threshold percentage parameter and the
current STA/LTA trigger threshold value. For example, a STA/LTA de-trigger threshold
level of 4 at an STA/LTA trigger threshold level of 8 is obtained by selecting the STA/LTA
de-trigger threshold percentage of 50%.

The STA/LTA de-trigger threshold level determines how well the coda waves of recorded
earthquakes will be captured. To preserve complete coda waves, low values are
required. On the other hand, if one is not interested in coda waves, significant savings in
memory are possible if high values of STA/LTA de-trigger threshold levels are used. An
STA/LTA de-trigger threshold percentage of 100% is the highest value possible. It makes
the STA/LTA trigger threshold level and the STA/LTA de-trigger threshold level equal.

In general, the noisier the site, the higher the value of the STA/LTA de-trigger threshold
level that must be used to prevent continuous, repeated re-triggering. This danger is
particularly high at sites heavily polluted by man-made seismic noise.

The recorder will always use an STA/LTA de-trigger threshold level of at least 1.2. For
example, if you select a 10% de-trigger threshold with the STA/LTA trigger threshold
level of 4, you would theoretically get 10% of 4 or 0.4 and the unit would be
continuously triggered. However, the recorder automatically uses a minimum STA/LTA
de-trigger threshold level of 1.2 to prevent this continuous triggering.

Page 65
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

A typical initial value of the de-trigger threshold is 2 to 3. The percentage set must be
calculated taking into account the current STA/LTA trigger threshold value. For example
with an STA/LTA trigger threshold of 4, and a desired STA/LTA de-trigger threshold of 2
you would need to set an STA/LTA de-trigger threshold percentage of 50%.

Default Values
STA/LTA trigger algorithm default parameters are:

STA (short time average) window duration = 1 sec


LTA (long time average) window duration = 60 sec
STA/LTA trigger threshold level = 4
STA/LTA de-trigger threshold percentage = 40%, resulting in an effective STA/LTA de-trigger
threshold level 1.6

Trigger Voting Parameters


Each channel can be assigned a number of votes that it may cast towards getting the system to
trigger. This is called "voting." How the voting system is set up is dependent on which signals you are
trying to record and which you are trying not to record. You may need some first-hand experience
with the conditions at the site before you can optimize this triggering. The parameters used to set
up the triggering are explained below.

Channel Weights (Trigger/Detrigger Votes)


The mechanics of this are relatively simple. You select the number of votes each channel will
contribute (when it is triggered) to the total number of votes required to trigger the system. Give
zero votes to a channel that you do not want to affect the triggering. Give a positive number of
votes to a channel you do want to contribute to the triggering. Give negative votes to a channel you
wish to inhibit triggering.

Trigger Weight
This is the total number of votes required to get the system to trigger.

Keyboard Votes
If you want to trigger the unit from a keyboard for test purposes, give the keyboard trigger the same
number of votes as the total trigger weight so that it will trigger the unit by itself (without any other
channels being triggered).

External Votes
This is the number of votes you assign to the external hardware trigger source. If you want all units
in the network to trigger when one unit triggers, assign it the same number of votes as the trigger
weight. If you want to use a combination of an external trigger with other internal criteria, set the
votes appropriately.

Page 66
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Examples of Voting Schemes


Classic Free-Field Site: Normally uses a three-channel internal EpiSensor with no interconnected
units. Each channel has 1 vote and requires only 1 vote to trigger. Any channel could trigger the
system.

Interconnected System: For example: two digitizers with internal EpiSensors in a building; one in the
basement and one on the roof. The digitizers are interconnected. Initially we set 1 vote for each
channel and the external trigger and 1 vote to trigger. We find that the digitizer on the roof often
triggers the system due to the building swaying in the wind. We can compensate for this by
changing the voting of the roof unit so that its three accelerometer channels have 1 vote while the
external trigger has 3 votes. We set the trigger weight to 3 in this unit. Now all of the channels on
the roof must trigger simultaneously to record or the unit must be forced to record by the unit in
the basement triggering.

System on a Bridge: With a 12-channel digitizer on a bridge with 12 sensors connected we could
start with all channels having 1 vote and requiring 1 vote to trigger. We may find that this system
triggers far too often from traffic vibration or swaying of the bridge. We could then require several
sensors to trigger by setting the votes to trigger to 2 or 3 and could even give those aligned with the
direction of sway 0 votes. In extreme cases we can give the channels aligned with the direction of
sway negative votes, so that several other channels must trigger to overcome their negative votes.

In conclusion, from these examples we can see the flexibility of the triggering options and some of
the ways this flexibility can be used in particular installations.

Page 67
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Anti-Alias Filtering
The recorder has a high-order anti-aliasing filter system that offers extremely steep ("brickwall") roll-off
combined with decimation of data. You can select between the causal or non-causal versions of these
filters depending on your application.

Use the final causal filter for precise seismic phase picking (this type of filter does not generate
precursors that might interfere with determining the precise onset time). Use the non-causal final filter
to avoid phase distortion of the signal.

The non-causal filter has a linear phase response that is equivalent to a pure time delay, and the phase
of the seismic signal is undistorted. Therefore, there is no need for de-convolution of seismic signals
when using these filters if you are primarily concerned with phase distortion. The degree to which their
pass-band amplitude characteristics modify seismic signals is tolerable in most seismological
applications.

ASCII files containing the coefficients of all these filters can be downloaded from the Kinemetrics Web
site or at www.kinemetrics.com.

These filters are implemented as two to eight stage, multi-rate, Finite Impulse Response (FIR) filters.
They offer extremely steep low pass amplitude response. The -3dB point is at 40% of the Sampling
Frequency, while at the Nyquist Frequency (50% of the Sampling Frequency) the amplitude is -130dB.
The first-stage (A) filters have sinc5 compensation. A 30K data stream from the A/D converter is
decimated by the appropriate factors to get to an intermediate data stream at twice the final sampling
rate. The final filter is a decimate by 2 brickwall filter, causal or non-causal. The table below lists the final
sample rate, filter name, number of coefficients and decimation for the anti-alias filters used in the Rock
Recorder Family.

2000 sps: 250 sps:


coefA5_50_s5c ( 59, /5 ) coefA5_50_s5c ( 59, /5)
coefB3_80 ( 179, /3 ) or coefA3_50 ( 35, /3 )
coefB3C_80 ( 179, /3 ) coefA2_20 ( 85, /2 )
coefA2_20 ( 85, /2 )
1000 sps: coefB2_80 ( 173, /2 ) or
coefA5_50_s5c ( 59, /5 ) coefB2C_80 ( 173, /2 )
coefA3_50 ( 35, /3 )
coefB2_80_140 ( 133, /2 ) or 200 sps:
coefB2C_80_140 ( 133, /3 ) coefA5_50_s5c ( 59, /5 )
coefA3_50 ( 35, /3 )
500 sps: coefA5_50 ( 85, /5)
coefA5_50_s5c ( 59, /5 ) coefB2_80 ( 173, /2 ) ) or
coefA3_50 ( 35, /3 ) coefB2C_80 ( 173, /2 )
coefA2_20 ( 85, /2 )
coefB2_80 ( 173, /2 ) or
coefB2C_80 ( 173, /2 )

Page 68
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

100 sps
coefA5_50_s5c ( 59, /5 )
coefA3_50 ( 35, /3 )
coefA2_20 ( 85, /2 )
coefA5_50 ( 85, /5 )
coefB2_80 ( 173, /2 ) ) or
coefB2C_80 ( 173, /2 )

50 sps:
coefA5_50_s5c ( 59, /5 )
coefA3_50 ( 35, /3 )
coefA4_50 ( 69, /4 )
coefA5_50 ( 85, /5 )
coefB2_80 ( 173, /2 ) ) or
coefB2C_80 ( 173, /2 )

20 sps:
coefA5_50_s5c ( 59, /5 )
coefA3_50 ( 35, /3 )
coefA2_20 ( 85, /2 )
coefA5_50 ( 85, /5 )
coefA5_50 ( 85, /5 )
coefB2_80 ( 173, /2 ) ) or
coefB2C_80 ( 173, /2 )

10 sps:
coefA5_50_s5c ( 59, /5 )
coefA3_50 ( 35, /3 )
coefA4_50 ( 69, /4 )
coefA5_50 ( 85, /5 )
coefA5_50 ( 85, /5 )
coefB2_80 ( 173, /2 ) ) or
coefB2C_80 ( 173, /2 )

1 sps:
coefA5_50_s5c ( 59, /5 )
coefA3_50 ( 35, /3 )
coefA2_20 ( 85, /2 )
coefA4_50 ( 69, /4 )
coefA5_50 ( 85, /5 )
coefA5_50 ( 85, /5 )
coefA5_50 ( 85, /5 )
coefB2_80 ( 173, /2 ) ) or
coefB2C_80 ( 173, /2 )

Page 69
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Group delay is automatically and transparently compensated by the recorder, so the time stamps are accurate for the
first scan and the trigger scan.

SPS Non-causal empirical (sec) Causal empirical Sample Period (mSec)


(sec)
2000 0.0160 0.00265717 0.5
1000 0.0365 0.0070 1
500 0.1105 0.0305 2
250 0.2385 0.0845 4
200 0.2380 0.0405 5
100 0.4935 0.1085 10
50 0.9475 0.1695 20
20 2.4025 0.4835 50
10 4.7335 0.8475 100
1 47.6425 9.2100 1000

Page 71
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Time Over Ethernet (TOE)


The Rock TOE feature is used to share timing between Rock units using standard Ethernet cable. Use of this feature
requires that both the master and slave units be equipped with the 112145-PL Time Over Ethernet option board.

As of this writing, TOE allows two (and only two) Granite or Basalt systems to be interconnected for a common time
base. It is useful when either a) GPS is not available or b) when it is impractical or undesirable to install two separate GPS
antennas.

When GPS is not used, the Granite designated as a slave will track the masters time precisely. If the master is locked to
GPS, the slave is also indirectly locked to GPS. ADC samples between the master and slave will be taken at the same time
to typically less than 200 nanoseconds. The slaves timing system is phase locked to the masters in the same way that a
normal unit is phase locked to GPS.

This could for example be a 36 channel Granite system with GPS and a second 36 channel Granite system without GPS
allowing for a total of 72 accurately timed channels.

TOE CAN use existing Ethernet cabling if the normally unused pairs are free in the Ethernet cabling. TOE performance
should be very stable at the maximum Ethernet cable length of 100 meters (320 ft.). Note that it CANNOT be routed
through Ethernet hubs, switches, or routers.

Theory of Operation

The Rock TOE feature works by sending a serial time code (similar to common IRIG serial time codes but proprietary to
Kinemetrics referred to internally as IRIG-K) from the master units DSP to a slave units DSP using Ethernet media as
the physical transmission link. The timing information is sent over standard Ethernet Category-5 or Category-6 CABLE by
using timed hardware generated timing packets.

The TOE time code consists of a serial frame made up of one hundred pulses per second. The pulses are 2 ms, 5 ms, and
8 ms wide indicating binary zeros, binary ones, or sync markers respectively. The edges of these pulses are encoded into
Ethernet-like packets for transmission over standard Cat-5 or Cat-6 cabling.

The master unit encodes the pulses and transmits them where the slave receives them and decodes them to reconstruct
the TOE time code frames exactly as transmitted by the master unit. The master unit locks its TCXO to GPS (assuming
reception is possible) and the slave locks its TCXO to that of the master. If GPS is not being received, the master just free
runs its TCXO. The slave will still lock its TCXO to that of the master via the TOE interconnect. The role of master or slave
unit is specified by setting the Time Source parameter appropriately in the System Operation link of the Rockhound web
interface.

Page 72
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Connection

A two-headed Ethernet cable 112075 is required. It is similar to the 112293 Rock Ethernet cable except that it breaks
out into TOE and Ethernet data cables.

Connect P1 (labeled Ethernet LAN) on 112075 cables to the Rock unit Ethernet front panel connector.

Connect P2 (labeled Ethernet) leads to network equipment (hub/switch/router).

Connect P3 (labeled TOE) leads to P3 lead of other system using standard RJ-45 coupler. This connection can be
extended up to 100 m using Cat-5 cables and coupler.

NOTE! P3 leads SHOULD NOT be connected to standard Ethernet equipment. No damage will occur but it
wont work and may cause temporary network problems.

You configure one unit as the master (preferably with GPS) and the other has a slave by setting the parameters
appropriately. The TOE interface is bi-directional. The master transmits and the slave receives. Note that the TOE cabling
is not intended for exposure to the elements. If needed, a passive interconnect box can be designed using the PT/RJ-
45 feed-through connectors or suitable cable glands.

Page 73
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

TCP/IP Primer
Terminology

IP Address The address of a device that uniquely identifies it so it can be found on a network. Typically this is a four
part numeric address such as 192.168.1.1. Each part ranges 0 to 255.

Network A collection of devices which can communicate with each other by knowing each others addresses.

Internal Network An internal network (and the devices in it) cannot normally be directly accessed from the outside
world, but they MAY be allowed to access the outside world. If you have one computer and a router, you have an
internal network. Internal networks typically have the first three parts of the address the same for example
192.168.1.x will be used for all devices in the network, with only the x part varying.

Router Equipment that bridges between internal networks and the Internet. A router will view devices on the internal
network with one range of addresses, and will present a single address to the Internet. A router also serves to restrict
access to the internal network. This restriction/protection is known as a firewall.

Switch Allows you to connect multiple networked devices together. Many routers include several open sockets
allowing them to also act as a switch.

Hub A dumb predecessor to the switch. Do not use a hub when the network includes different speed devices
because it will bring all devices on the network down to the speed of the slowest device.

Crossover When connecting two devices directly together without a switch (such as a Rock and your PC only), use a
crossover cable or adapter to allow the direct connection. (Think null modem for Ethernet)

Gateway This is the address where all external address requests are sent. In most internal networks, this will be the
address of the router so that the device can access the Internet when needed.

Netmask Defines which addresses are inside the network and which are outside the network. 255.255.255.0 (class C) is
typical, meaning that only the last part of the address varies within the network. Everything else is outside.

Services or Ports A single device may have one to several thousand different services running on it. Services can
include things like web services, e-mail, and file transfers among many. Each service runs on a numbered port at an IP
Address. These port numbers are somewhat standardized.

Client vs. Server In communication over TCP/IP there is generally a Server (the one providing the service) and a Client
(the one using the service). Devices can act as both. They may, for example be a Client for web services when opening a
web browser and may at the same time be a Server providing services such as file storage.

DHCP A Service that automatically assigns IP Addresses. Typically, your ISP assigns an Internet address to your router
and your router assigns an internal address to your device.

Page 74
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

DNS A Domain Name Server is a service on the Internet that translates names, like www.kmi.com into a numeric
address. Usually the DNS is provided by your ISP and the address of the DNS server is forwarded by DHCP.

Addresses

A devices address may be static or dynamic. A dynamic address is the most common, with another device (a DHCP server) assigning
the addresses on request.

Dynamic addresses are convenient because they are managed automatically and dont require the involvement of System
Administrators to assign them.

The problem with dynamic addresses though is that they are just that dynamic. This means that their address is uncertain and can
change from one day or one minute to the next.

The typical dynamic connection has a router that gets an IP Address from the ISP. The router translates the addresses within your
internal network to the outside address from the ISP. When you surf the web or send e-mail this translation is unseen. However, if
you wanted to access your computer from work or from a coffee shop it can be difficult because you cannot be sure of the IP
Address assigned to your router (and thus your device) at the moment.

In order to access a device remotely, you need a well known or static address. Most companies and organizations have static
addresses because they must be routinely accessed from the Internet. Static addresses cost more.

Some Guidelines

Typical internal addresses are 10.x.x.x, 192.168.x.x, or 172.16.x.x thru 172.31.x.x. These addresses should only be used within an
internal network and should NEVER be exposed directly to the Internet.

Using 0 or 255 in the final part of an IP address has special meaning and should not be used for any normal address. So, for example
do not use:

192.168.1.0

192.168.1.255

10.0.1.0

10.0.1.255

When using devices within an internal network, use dynamic addresses whenever possible. Assigning static addresses has the
potential for conflict with other devices on the network and should only be done after consulting with the System Administrator.

Assigning the same static IP address to multiple units can cause problems as your network may remember the address as belonging
to a previous unit and get confused (even if theyre not connected to the network at the same time). Use unique addresses if
possible.

If you have configured a standalone Rock as DHCP server, you should disable this functionality before you connect the Rock to your
internal LAN or you may cause yourself networking problems due to the conflict in address assignments.

Page 75
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Typical Configurations

Rock products are configured as DHCP clients out-of-the-box. This means that they will try to get an IP Address
from your network. To determine which address has been assigned, your best bet is to use the Rocks Linux
serial console connection and the Linux command ipaddr eth0.
When the Rock will be deployed using a router (such as in a structure using a DSL connection), you may let the
Rock obtain an address from the router or you may assign a static address within the internal network. The
outside address of the router will either be statically assigned or dynamically assigned by the ISP depending on
the service purchased. The Rock is accessed externally using the address of the router. It may be necessary to
poke holes in the firewall to allow external access to some services.
If the network is local only (no router used), use static addresses within the internal network.
If the Rock is standalone and you will occasionally connect a computer (a laptop?) to configure the unit or
obtain data, then configure the Rock to have a static address (usually 192.168.9.1) and to act as a DHCP server.
This way, you need only connect your laptop to communicate with the Rock. The Rock will assign the laptop an
address and you will not have to manually configure your laptop.
The Rocks IP address is configured using the netconfig script from Linux.

Rock Services

By default, the following services are enabled:

PING NTP
SSH POC
HTTP
By default, the following services are disabled:

FTP
TELNET
TFTP

Further

Distance limitations Ethernet is limited to a standard distance of 100 meters. It is possible to push this limit a little bit, but there
are no guarantees. To extend the limit, you need a powered Ethernet repeater, or a powered inline switch.

DSL connections are asymmetric A typical DSL line has different speeds for upload than for download. These connections are
designed for web surfing. They are typically 8X faster on download than upload. So you must understand that although the
connections are cheap, your 3Mb connection is actually only a 375Kb connection when you upload, such as streaming real-time data
or sending recorded data back to the data center.

Internet security is a complex topic. The gist of it though is this:

SSH (which includes SFTP) allows secure logins and file transfers over the internet.
TELNET is totally in the clear meaning that anyone watching can see exactly what you type, including
passwords. It should generally NOT be used over the Internet.

Page 76
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

FTP or TFTP is also sent in the clear, but can be useful. For example, setting up an FTP Server at a data center can
be a useful and easy way to upload the data from your equipment. Although not inherently secure, you can
easily configure most FTP Servers so that data once uploaded, cannot be seen or accessed from the internet.
This causes your data center to lose its appeal to hackers who might be tempted to use your system for data
storage.
Enabling the Rock as an FTP Server over the Internet is also generally discouraged because this exposes system
passwords every time that you log into FTP over the Internet. It can be useful though under some conditions
such as:
When the unit is not connected to the Internet (such as within your lab)
For a temporary connection where you are willing to take the risk e.g. connect to the unit once a year to
upload new firmware and then immediately disable FTP again.
Using a VPN or tunnel connection where all traffic to the unit is encrypted and protected by a wrapping layer
provided by the router. This is an advanced subject and is not covered here.

An alternative to using a more expensive static IP Address is to use the Rocks Point-of-Contact (POC) service. This
service reports the Rocks current IP Address to a Point-of-Contact server every few minutes. Customers who subscribe
to the Kinemetrics Point-of-Contact service can log onto www.kmipoc.com and see the current locations of their units.
This is a fee-for-service feature, but is usually much cheaper than obtaining a static IP Address. You can then connect to
the units at their current address using the web interface, SFTP (for file transfers) or SSH for secure Linux login
connections. In order to use POC, you must use DNS. POC may be redirected to a customers own server or disabled by
using the pocconfig script from Linux.

Rock units that wish to send e-mail can configure the e-mail file or message senders to use the KMI mail relay. In this
way, the mail is routed through a dedicated Kinemetrics mail server so that you dont have to configure or maintain your
own mail server which can be fairly complex. The mail relay accepts mail only from recognized Rock units (so as not to
forward SPAM) and requires only that you use DNS and specify the target e-mail address.

For further information, see the Rock Digitizer Users Manual, Kinemetrics P/N 300715.

For in-depth reading on TCP/IP, see RFC 2151 - A Primer On Internet and TCP/IP Tools and Utilities

Also good, but less formal is Daryl's TCP/IP Primer, which can be found at www.ipprimer.com

Page 77
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

File Management and Retrieval


Basic file access is done through the web interface. To see recorded files, select Recorded Files from the left pane. Youll
see:

Each of the thumbnail pictures shown on the right represents one recorded file. These pictures are small files for fast
download and display. They show only enough detail to help you distinguish which files are sensor tests, meaningful
triggers, or useless noise data.

Page 78
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

To see a bit more detail, you can click on each picture to see an expanded but still static picture:

If needed, you can use your browsers zoom function (usually holding the CTRL key and scrolling the mouse wheel will
zoom in and out).

Individual files can be downloaded by clicking the file name (like aza001.evt) and selecting save.

Files can be deleted by selecting it (or them) under the corresponding filename(s) and clicking Delete Selected.

To manage large numbers of files (downloading and/or deleting them), you should use a program such as WinSCP, which
is described later in this manual under Tools.

Page 79
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

File Viewing
The Recorded Files screen described above allows you to overview your recorded files using static pictures. However,
often you need to look a little closer. For this purpose, the digitizer includes an Interactive File Viewer. The Interactive
File Viewer can be accessed either from the bottom of the Recorded Files page, or directly from the left pane. It will
open in a separate browser window:

Page 80
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

To view a file, select the filename and press View. The file and the Interactive File Viewer application will be downloaded
into your PC:

Though not covered in detail here, note that you can zoom, pan, change display units, apply grid lines, sync displays in
the X and Y axes, and do many other things.

The viewer does not have to be installed in your computer. It will download from the digitizer when it is needed.

NOTE: If the Interactive File Viewer does not display files, it may be that port 80 access is restricted by
your Anti-Virus software. See Interactive File Viewer Doesnt List Any Files

NOTE: If the Interactive File Viewer wont download large files, see FileViewer and Large Files

Page 81
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Waveform Viewing
In addition to being able to view recorded files after theyve been recorded, you can also view live waveforms as the
data is digitized. To do this, select Waveform Viewer:

Page 82
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Once the list is displayed, select one or more virtual channels from the list on the right (including SOH channels) and
then press View Channel:

Note that you can select the display units.

If selected, notice the buttons for live FFT and PSD displays, which will produce something like this:

NOTE: If the Waveform Viewer starts and then stops, see Waveform Viewer Stops Updating

Page 83
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Online Documentation
The digitizer comes with online documentation files that can be accessed from the web interface. To access the
documentation, click the Documentation link in the Tools section of the left pane. You will see a categorized list of
documents as shown here:

Page 84
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Clicking on the documents file name (for example 304702h.pdf) will download and open the file within your browser:

This documentation is included in the firmware package, so firmware updates will include updates to the
documentation.

In addition, you can prepare and send your own packages of documentation using the Create Documentation Package
function of the Administrative Details page. This function will allow you to create a .jar file containing any set of
documents that you want stored on the unit such as wiring diagrams, installation and/or maintenance procedures, etc.
For each document you will choose a document category (and you can create new document categories as needed).

Once youve prepared your documentation package, you can use the Send Documentation Package function of the
Administrative Details to send the documents to the digitizer. After sending the package, press Validate to install it.

Note that you only need to prepare your documentation package once, and then you can send it to as many units as you
would like to.

Page 85
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Remote Connections
The Connect link will open a pane with a Remote Utility Connections display:

The four features listed top to bottom are:

Rockhound console. This opens a Rockhound console on the unit which you can use for digitizer-specific utility
functions such as commanding a keyboard trigger or a functional test. This is normally done using PuTTY or
telnet.
OS Connect. This will open an Operating System connection, giving you a Linux login prompt so that you can do
Operating System level maintenance. This is normally done using a secure connection like PuTTY.
File Transfers. This will open a File Transfer utility that you can use to transfer files to and from the unit. This is
normally done using a secure program like WinSCP.
Clear Remembered Utilities. This will erase the utilities currently remembered that are to be used with these
features. This will allow you to reassign the features on your PC to a new program.

The first time that you use one of these functions, it will ask you which program should be used for this function. Once
you make a selection, that program will be used on your PC from here forward until you clear the remembered utilities.

Page 86
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

For example, if you press Rockhound Console, you will see:

If your Operating System provides a working telnet, you can click Yes and the setup will be complete. If youd like to
use another program, click No and navigate to the appropriate program, for example:

Page 87
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

After clicking Open, the connection will open as shown:

For more details on PuTTY, see PuTTY.

When selecting the OS Connect, it is recommended that you use a secure connection like PuTTY.

When selecting the File Transfer utility, it is recommended that you use a secure file transfer program like WinSCP. After
assigning it, you will see this:

Page 88
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

This is a one-time message that you will get warning you that your PC and the digitizer are exchanging security keys so
that they know about each other. Youll then be asked for a Linux user name and password to log in, and then youll
see:

Once this window opens, you are now in WinSCP and can transfer files by dragging and dropping files.

For more details on WinSCP, see WinSCP.

Page 89
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Overview of the Web Interface


The web interface to the digitizer allows you to configure and operate your digitizer using a web browser without
installing any Kinemetrics-specific software. The web browser should be HTML 1.1 compliant (or later), support frames,
and should support Java and Java applets.

You need to have Java installed on your PC in order to use most of the interesting features of the digitizer. You can get
Java from java.sun.com. If you have to use the PC without Java, it will still basically work, but you will not be able to use
some features. In case theres a question, what you want is the JRE or Java Run Time for J2SE.

If you plan to display large files or many channels in the Waveform Viewer, you may want to go ahead now and increase
the memory available to Java Applets. See FileViewer and Large Files

To access the digitizer through the web interface:

Open a web browser on your PC. In the address bar of the browser, type the IP address of the digitizer for example
64.60.212.93. Youll be presented with a login prompt:

Web logins use a relatively secure Digest Authentication login. Log into the unit using the username and password used
by your unit. By default, the username is rock and the password is kmi.

Page 90
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Two groups of accounts may be set up:

Client level users can view things, but cannot make any changes.
Admin level users have administrative access, meaning that configuration changes can be made.

Multiple web users from multiple IP addresses can log in at one time. But if more than one Admin level user tries to log
in at one time, the first user gets Full Access (read/write), all others get Limited Access (read only).

Admin users who are given Limited Access can force the other Admin user to log off so that they can obtain Full Access.
Client users are not affected since they only have Limited Access.

After 60 minutes of inactivity, any connected web user will be logged off. So if you forget to log out of the Web
Interface, the system will log you out after this time automatically.

Type a user name and password in and press OK. Note the semi-random usage tip that displays at login:

Page 91
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Press OK to go on to the Overview screen:

Page 92
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

The links in the left-hand frame (top to bottom) are:

Overview: The main status screen

Log Out: Log out of the web interface

State-of-Health: Access to State-of-Health displays

Waveform Viewer: Display of real-time waveforms

Triggering & Sensors: Commanded triggers, sensor tests, and sensor control

Recorded Files: A display of recorded file thumbnails

Interactive File Viewer: Download and display files interactively

Parameters:

Hardware: Edit of hardware specific parameters

System Operation: Edit of application specific parameters

Layout Display: Graphical display of the module layout

Channel Summary: Displays a table of channel configurations

Site Summary: Displays summary information for the site (including networking setup)

Apply Changes Now: Apply parameter changes and restart

Advanced Features: Access to more advanced setup options

Tools:

Runtime-Log: A display of the run time log file

Error-Log: A display of the error log file

Maintenance Log: Make maintenance history entries

Documentation: Online documentation access

Connect: Connect for console use or file transfers

Limited Access: Relinquish Full Access to other users

Log Out: Log out of the web interface (will automatically happen after 1 hour)

Page 93
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Links:

Kinemetrics Web Site: www.kmi.com

Kinemetrics Contacts: Kinemetrics Contact page

Technical Support: E-mail support@kmi.com

Local Events : Link to Local events web site using current GPS position

On-site weather : Link to local weather widget

Location map : Link to mapping web site for information about site based on current GPS position.

Other links (not shown) are optional:

Contact: Opens a customer-specific contact link

Page 94
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Hardware accesses hardware specific values such as specific IP addresses, number of channels, sensor types, voltage
ranges, serial numbers, etc.

Page 95
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

System Operation accesses installation independent values such as pre-event time, post event time, sample rates, and
other operational parameters.

The top of the System Operations page is a Parameter Map, which is a set of links to the individual parameter sets of
each module. This can be faster than scrolling to find a parameter.

Page 96
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

For example, to access the Rock Data Interface, click on that link and you will get:

Page 97
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Layout Display displays a picture of the current layout, along with a brief explanation of each module.

Page 98
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Apply Changes Now tells the Rock to make changes youve made permanent.

Page 99
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Channel Summary displays channel information:

Page 100
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Expanding the voting details shows:

Page 101
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Site Summary shows:

Page 102
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Advanced Features allows you to enable/disable special functions.

Page 103
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

State of Health displays SOH information that is logged short term (24 hrs) and long term (one year):

Page 104
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Page 105
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Page 106
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Waveform Viewer will load a Java applet that displays waveforms. For security reasons, you may have to accept the
applet:

Click on YES to proceed to the Viewer.

Page 107
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Once youve selected Yes, youll see this:

Select the channel(s) you want to see and press View Channel:

Page 108
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Page 109
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Note the options for FFT and PSD display:

NOTE: If the Waveform Viewer stops updating, see Waveform Viewer Stops Updating

Page 110
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Next is Recorded Files. This shows small (1-2kb) thumbnails of recorded files:

Page 111
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

If you click on a thumbnail, you can see a larger (6-10kb) thumbnail:

The links and buttons below the small thumbnails allow you to download or delete the files (one at a time) via HTTP.
Larger scale file maintenance is best done via SFTP or WinSCP.

Page 112
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

The Interactive File Viewer allows you to download and interact with recorded files using software that is something like
Altus QuickLook and that actually is downloaded FROM THE UNIT:

Page 113
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Clicking on the file name and then clicking VIEW will start the interactive file viewer:

The buttons along the top allow you to change grid mode, DAC mode, background color, units, number of columns,
mean removal, and autoscale. Plus you can zoom each channel individually (by drawing a box), pan (with arrow keys),
re-sync the X or Y axes, view the header, save the file, etc, etc.

NOTE: If the Interactive File Viewer wont download large files, see FileViewer and Large Files

Page 114
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Triggering & Sensors allows you to perform console or sensor test triggers:

Back on the Overview, status information is displayed at the bottom:

Page 115
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Editing Parameters
Parameters are divided into two main sections. Hardware parameters are those that are typically hardware related such
as sensor and channel specifics. System Operation parameters are those that are mainly related to how the system
operates things like trigger levels, pre-event and post-event times, and so on.

To edit hardware parameters, select Hardware Parameters from the left pane and youll see something like this:

Note that when you click the ? next to the name of a parameter that youll be shown the help string that provides
more detail about the purpose of the parameter:

Page 116
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

When youve finished editing the Hardware Parameters, click OK to save your changes.

Page 117
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

To edit System Operation Parameters, select System Operation from the left pane and youll see:

The top of the System Operations page is a Parameter Map, which is a set of links to the individual parameter sets of
each module. This can be faster than scrolling to find a parameter.

Page 118
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

For example, to access the Rock Data Interface, click on the link and you will get:

After completing your changes, be sure to press OK to save your changes.

Once you have completed your parameter changes, activate the completed parameter changes by selecting Apply
Changes Now from the left pane of the display. The system will restart and reconfigure itself to make your changes.
This may take a few minutes until the system is restarted and operational with your changes.

Page 119
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Adding Modules
You can add capabilities to your system by adding additional modules. The process is the same for adding modules of
any type. For example, to add a module to the system to push recorded event files automatically to a remote FTP server,
you will need to add an FTP Sender module. To accomplish this, select Advanced Features on the left pane and select
Module Add/Remove as shown:

Page 120
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Next, click OK and then click OK on Advanced User Setup Exit:

Page 121
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Select Module Add in the left pane and scroll down in the right pane to locate the FTP Sender:

Click Add to add the module.

Page 122
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Next, click System Operation in the left pane and select FTP Sender from the parameter map:

Page 123
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

The FTP Sender parameters will now appear at the top of the right pane as shown:

Configure the parameters for your new module as needed, then click OK to save your changes.

Next, click Apply Changes Now in the left pane. The system will restart and reconfigure itself to add the FTP Sender
module. This may take a few minutes until the system is restarted and operational with your new module.

Please note than for most modules (including the FTP Sender module used as an example here) that you can usually add
multiple modules of the same type. This could be useful where for example you want to send recorded files to more
than one remote FTP server. To do this, you would add one FTP Sender module for each destination.

Page 124
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Removing Modules
You can further alter the capabilities of your system by removing modules. The process is the same for removing
modules of any type. For example, to remove an FTP Sender module from the system, select Advanced Features on the
left pane and select Module Add/Remove as shown:

Page 125
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Next, click OK and then click OK on Advanced User Setup Exit:

Page 126
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Select Module Remove in the left pane and scroll down in the right pane to locate the FTP Sender:

Click Remove.

Page 127
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

You will be asked to confirm the removal as shown:

Next, click Apply Changes Now in the left pane. The system will restart and reconfigure itself to remove the FTP Sender
module. This may take a few minutes until the system is restarted and operational with your changes.

Page 128
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Replacing Modules
Sometimes what you need to do is replace a module in the system with another that has the same basic functionality.
For example, you may want to replace a data archiver that produces EVT files with one that produces MiniSEED files, or
you may want to replace a Threshold Trigger with an STA/LTA Trigger. For example, to change the data format from
Kinemetrics EVT file format to MiniSEED, use the web interface. Choose Advanced Features from the left side of the
display. Select Module Replacement and click OK:

Page 129
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

On the left pane of the screen, Module Replacement will now be an option below Advanced Features:

Page 130
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Click Module Replacement and youll see:

Page 131
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Click Replace for the Altus EVT Format Data Archiver and youll see your choices:

Page 132
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

If you select Choose next to MiniSEED Format Data Archiver, then youll replace the Altus EVT Format Data Archiver
with MiniSEED. The Module Replacement screen will now look like this:

In this example, it was pretty simple because there was only one EVT Archiver module in the system. But if you needed
to replace the Threshold Triggers with STA/LTA Triggers and you have a 36 channel system you can imagine that the
process could become a bit tedious. To make this a little better, you can select All instead of Choose when you are
shown the Compatible Modules pane. You can then replace all modules of one type with another.

Once you have completed your parameter changes, activate the completed parameter changes by selecting Apply
Changes Now from the left pane of the display.

Page 133
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Web Interface Advanced Features


The Advanced Features screen (selected by clicking Advanced Features in the left pane) appears as follows:

Page 134
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

These features are often unneeded in basic operation of the system, and as such are hidden to simplify normal
operation. When you select an advanced feature on the right and then click OK, that feature will now show up on the
left pane as an option:

The features listed here are as follows:

Module Add/Remove: Allows you to add additional modules into the layout or to delete modules from the layout. In
most cases, you can add multiple modules of a given type into the system. In some cases though there may be limits on
the maximum or minimum number of modules of a given type. See Adding Modules.

Module Replacement: Allows you to replace a module with any compatible module. Replacement options must perform
the same basic function in order to be compatible. For example, you could replace a Classic Strong Motion Trigger Filter
with any other trigger filter (but you would not be able to replace the module with something incompatible such as an
FTP Sender).

Page 135
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Advanced Modules: Some specialized modules require specialized or advanced knowledge of the system in order to be
successfully used. These modules are normally hidden as Advanced Modules and can only be seen as possible
selections by enabling this feature.

Advanced Parameters: Some specialized parameters for existing modules require specialized or advanced knowledge of
the system in order to be successfully used. These parameters are normally hidden as Advanced Parameters and can
only be seen and edited by enabling this feature.

Password Editing: In general, it is never a good idea to advertise passwords. So normally, system passwords (such as the
password for your Web Interface) are not included in the parameters presented for editing. To access your passwords,
select this feature and choose System Operation and Passwords from the left pane.

Layout Wizard: Will allow you to create a completely new layout by answering some basic questions about the type of
layout, number of channels, and so on. After creating the basic layout, you may still need to add some additional
modules that you need as well as doing initial setup of the parameters. The process is further described in the section
Layout Wizard.

Administrative Details: The Administrative Details pane allows you to perform various administrative functions such as:

Uploading or downloading parameter files


Uploading or downloading system registration (used for enabling some special features)
Uploading software updates
Creating and sending documentation packages

Debug Level Editing: The various software modules which contain specialized debugging modes that can be enabled
using this pane. These modes should only be used by or under the direction of factory personnel.

Test Modules and Parameters: Some specialized modules and parameters are classified as test features and are
accessed using this pane. They should only be used by or under the direction of factory personnel.

Page 136
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

File Viewer
The File Viewer is a downloaded Java application that is loaded into your PC from the Interactive File Viewer. A brief
summary of capabilities follows. Upon launch, the initial File Viewer display looks like this:

The File Viewer consists of a graphic display area (below), a menu, and a set of toolbar buttons. Left to right, the toolbar
buttons are as follows:

Open Opens a file for display. Once the program has been started, it can be used to open other files. As of this writing,
the File Viewer supports Kinemetrics EVT files and MiniSEED files (with some restrictions) when used with a .m
extension. In the case of MiniSEED, multiple files for the same time period may be opened at once.

Save As Allows saving of the current file in another directory or under another name.

Print Prints the current time series.

Setup Allows configuration of additional File Viewer features. The Setup dialog looks like:

Page 137
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Setup selections include:

Columns Select the number of columns of graphic displays. You could for example, organize an 18
channel record into 1 column of 18 plots, two columns of 9 plots, or three columns of 6 plots.

Mean Allows mean removal from the data, or As Read display.

Autoscale Allows autoscale as Global (all channels scaled to largest signal), Individual (channels
scaled individually), or None

Page 138
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Header Display Displays header information as is available from the file:

Grid Mode Displays grid lines on the plots if requested.

Negative Display Displays plots as green on black or blue on white.

DAC Mode Displays data points as point-to-point, or showing individual signal levels for each sample. This is usually
only discernable when zoomed in closely.

Multi-channel Mode Displays all channels or only one channel at a time. In single channel mode, channels can be
selected with the Page Up / Page Down keys.

Units Allows selection of display units. Choices include counts, volts, g, cm/s2, or gal. Note that correct bit weight and
sensitivity settings are required for proper scaling of the data.

Page 139
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Cursor Enables cursor mode so that you can click to display exact time and amplitude of individual sample values. Note
that the cursor can be moved with another mouse click or by using the left and right arrow keys:

Re-Sync X-Axes Allows you to synchronize the display of all channels in the X-axis to show the same time period. You
could, for example zoom in on an area of one channel, and then re-sync the other channels to show the same time
period.

Re-Sync Y Axes Allows you to synchronize the display of all channels in the Y-axis to show the same amplitude range.
You could, for example zoom in on an area of one channel, and then re-sync the other channels to show the same
amplitude range.

Zoom Out Zooms out to the original full scale range or autoscale setting.

About Shows the current version of the program.

NOTE: If the Interactive File Viewer wont download large files, see FileViewer and Large Files

Page 140
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

File Viewer Dynamic Operation


The File Viewer contains some dynamic display manipulation features as follows:

Zooming: When NOT in Cursor mode, you can zoom on any channel by using the mouse to draw a box around the area
of interest:

Page 141
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Once zoomed, the display will look like this:

Note that the zoomed data will show a different amplitude and/or time period. You can zoom in multiple times, and un-
zoom one level at a time using a right click of the mouse. Zooming will remember five levels of zoom for each plot.

Panning of the selected plot is also supported regardless of zoom level. The arrow keys allow panning left, right, up, or
down.

NOTE: If the Interactive File Viewer wont download large files, see FileViewer and Large Files

Page 142
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Rockhound Command Console


The Rockhound Command Console can be opened in any of a number of ways:

Through the Connect link in the left pane of the web interface. Select Connect and then choose Rockhound
Console from the right pane.
If you are using RockTalk rather than the web interface, then you can open the Command Console using the
Terminal Window feature of RockTalk.
You can also open the Command Console using a telnet or PuTTY connection at port 9900
You can also connect to the system using SSH and then use telnet within the SSH session to open the Command
Console on a telnet connection on localhost (127.0.0.1) at port 9900.

Once open, you will need to know the console password in order to log in.

Command Console parameters are available under System Operation parameters as shown here:

Page 143
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

The Command Console once open will look like this:

The help command can be used as shown to list standard, advanced, or all commands. The list of available commands
is as follows:

ALARM - Set the state of the Rock Alarm bit.


Usage: ALARM on|off

BASEDIR - Report the base installation directory.


Usage: BASEDIR

BATTERYTEST - Command a power supply battery test.


Usage: BATTERYTEST secs

BROADCAST - Send a message to all modules.


Usage: BROADCAST {command} [optional argv1] [optional argv2] [...]

CALCHECK - Checks front end calibration in the 20V range.


(intended for factory use only)
Usage: CALCHECK zerorange fsrange

CALIBRATE - Performs and reports calibration.


(intended for factory use only)
Usage: CALIBRATE fec/dac/avx/view/grade

CLREVT - Clear event counter.


Usage: CLREVT

Page 144
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

CLS - Clears the screen.


Usage: CLS

CRFLUSH - Request an early flush of continuously recorded data files.


Usage: CRFLUSH

CTIME - Display the current time.


Usage: CTIME

DACCHECK - Checks DAC calibration in the 20V range.


(intended for factory use only)
Usage: DACCHECK zerorange fsrange

DATAFLOW - Display current Data Flow stats.


Usage: DATAFLOW

DIR - Display a complete directory lising.


Usage: DIR {path}

DSPCMD - Send a command to the Rock DSP.


Usage: DSPCMD (addr) (cmd)

ECHO - Turns character echo on/off.


Usage: ECHO {on|off}

EEPROM - Display status of board ID EEPROMs.


Usage: EEPROM

EXIT - Exits the console session.


Usage: EXIT

EXTCHARGERTEST - Command a power supply external charger test.


Usage: EXTCHARGERTEST mins

GPS - GPS and Timing control functions.


Usage: GPS STAT: Timing system status
GPS ID: Timing system type and version
GPS RUN: Enable timing system
GPS STOP: Disable timing system
GPS ON: Turn on GPS power
GPS OFF: Turn off GPS power
GPS DIAG on|off|val: Timing system diagnostics
vals: 1=Time reports 2=Time verifies
vals: 4=Time quality 8=Time syncs
vals: 10=Position reports 20=State of health
vals: 40=Satellites & SNRs
GPS DAC on|off: Timing system TCXO reports

Help Options:

Help std - List standard commands


Help adv - List advanced commands
Help all - List all commands
Help * - Help for every command
Help {command} - Help for a specific command

Page 145
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

HOSTSERVICES - Report current services and associated port numbers.

HWID - Display the hardware ID string.


Usage: HWID

KBTRI - Keyboard trigger.


Usage: KBTRI (secs)

LOOPBACKATE - Performs factory ATE loopback using special test hardware.


(intended for factory use only)
Usage: LOOPBACKATE typ arglist

LS - Display a brief directory listing.


Usage: LS {path}

MINFO - Display info about currently loaded modules.


Usage: MINFO

MKBATCH - Creates a batch file by typing in lines of commands.


Usage: MKBATCH file

MSGLEVEL - Set the level of messages sent to this session.


Usage: MSGLEVEL {level, 0=None, 1=Critical, 2=All}

MSTIME - Display the system time in milliseconds since Epoch.


Usage: MSTIME

NOISETEST - Performs and reports a main channel noise test.


(intended for factory use only)
Usage: NOISETEST

NWDEFER - Defers network triggering temporarily.


Usage: NWDEFER secs

OWSBCHECK - Check the One-Wire Sensor Bus by testing for


device discovery on each active sensor bus channel.
(intended for factory use only)
Usage: OWSBCHECK

PAUSE - Pause and wait for user input.


Usage: PAUSE

PING - Request a PONG reply.


Usage: PING [optional reply text]

PLLCHECK - Checks clock drift and VCO range.


(intended for factory use only)
Usage: PLLCHECK lcerange vcorange

RECONFIG - Command re-read of the configuration files.

RSVERIFY - Verify that unit has not restarted under stress test conditions.
Arg=0 saves current restart for later comparison.
Arg!=0 checks restart count against saved.

Page 146
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

(intended for factory use only)


Usage: RSVERIFY rsflag

RTPARAMS - Display current system runtime parameters.


Usage: RTPARAMS [optional key-match]

RUN - Run a batch file by executing commands


in it as if they were typed.
Usage: RUN file

SETDEBUGMASK - Set the debug mask for a given module.


Usage: SETDEBUGMASK {module} [value (default=0)]

SLEEP - Sleep the specified number of seconds.


Usage: SLEEP seconds

SNSCAL - Do sensor calibration.


Usage: SNSCAL (type)

SOHCHECK - Checks BF analog voltage values.


(intended for factory use only)
Usage: SOHCHECK value range (10 each)

SOHFLUSH - Request a flush of SOH data files when using the optional web server interface.
Usage: SOHFLUSH

STEP - Apply the sensor step voltage.


Usage: STEP

STIME - Display the system start time.


Usage: STIME

TEMPCHECK - Checks temperature against actual. Range


against expected must allow for case rise.
(intended for factory use only)
Usage: TEMPCHECK expected range

UNSTEP - Remove the sensor step voltage.


Usage: UNSTEP

USERSTAT - Write numeric parameter to user status stream.


Usage: USERSTAT num

VALIDATE - Validates firmware or config update. If valid may cause restart.


Usage: To validate and restart: VALIDATE UPDATE
To validate and dynamically reconfigure: VALIDATE RECONFIG

VCOCHECK - Check the VCO response by offsetting and monitoring drift.


(intended for factory use only)
Usage: VCOCHECK secs vcodelta mindrift maxdrift

VCOSTABLE - Sets VCO initial value for stable temperature and GPS locked.
(intended for factory use only)
Usage: VCOSTABLE

Page 147
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

VCOVERIFY - Verify that VCO has not changed. Arg=0 saves current VCO for
later comparison. Arg!=0 checks VCO against saved.
(intended for factory use only)
Usage: VCOVERIFY vcorange

VER - Display the software and hardware version numbers.


Usage: VER

VMBYTES - Display the total bytes available, and bytes free in the Virtual Machine.
Usage: VMBYTES

VMEXIT - Exits the Virtual Machine, restarting...


Usage: VMEXIT

VMGC - Force Garbage Collection in the Virtual Machine.


Usage: VMGC

VMPROPS - Display the Virtual Machine properties.


Usage: VMPROPS

VTDSET - Set voltage range during ATE testing. 0=2.5V, 1=5V, 2=20V
(intended for factory use only)
Usage: VTDSET range

WATCHDOGTEST - Cause a system restart via a software watchdog.


Usage: WATCHDOGTEST

Page 148
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Batch Mode
The Rockhound Command Console supports a limited batch mode process to make it somewhat easier to perform
routine activities such as periodic maintenance. The MKBATCH command is used to create a batch file by name,
accepting input until RETURN only is entered. Lines of the file are executed as commands as if typed by the user. Lines
starting with ; or # are treated as comments and ignored.

The batch file will be created with the extension .BAT on the digitizer.

For example:

> mkbatch mybatch


Type in lines of commands, one command per line.
When done, press RETURN only to close the file.
> ; Quarterly Maintenance
> ; Get GPS status
> gps stat
> ; Do a 2 minute battery test
> batterytest 120
> ; Wait a bit
> sleep 150
> ; Do a sensor calibration
> snscal
>
Batch file creation complete.
>
To run the batch file, type:

> run mybatch

Page 149
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Non-networked Use
If you dont intend to normally connect your digitizer to a network, we still recommend that you set up the digitizers
network so that you can control the digitizer from your local PC when youre on site.

To communicate directly between the digitizer and a PC over Ethernet without using any supporting network hardware,
youll connect the digitizer to the PC using an Ethernet crossover cable. Once connected, you should be able to operate
the digitizer in its typical networked modes.

In this case, we recommend the following parameters:

Digitizer:

IP Address: 192.168.1.1
Netmask: 255.255.255.0
Gateway: 192.168.1.100
DNS: None
PC:

IP Address: 192.168.1.100
Netmask: 255.255.255.0
Gateway: 192.168.1.100
DNS: None
You may also consider configuring the digitizer to act as a DHCP server, meaning that the digitizer can supply the IP
address to your PC when you connect it without having to reconfigure the PC. Using the digitizer as a DHCP server can
only be done if the digitizer is not on a network with another DHCP server, such as in a standalone configuration. To use
the digitizer as a DHCP server:

Digitizer:

IP address: 192.168.9.1
Netmask: 255.255.255.0
Gateway: 192.168.9.1
DNS: None

Then enable the DHCP server:

Under Linux 2.4:


initdconfig dhcp on
reboot
Under Linux 2.6:
initdconfig isc-dhcp-server on
reboot

Page 150
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

PC:

IP address: Automatically assigned


If you plan to normally only operate the digitizer through a modem, Kinemetrics recommends that you add the Altus
Emulation module. This module provides many capabilities, but the ones of interest here are:

Dial on event
File Transfer
Parameter Upload/Download
Firmware Update
If you will have multiple digitizers on an internal network at the site and you will NOT use a DHCP server (you need static
addresses), then we suggest using an addressing sequence such as 192.168.1.1 for the first, 192.168.1.2 for the second,
and so on.

For details of how to perform these functions, see the section Modem Only Operation later on in this manual.

Page 151
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Altus Emulation
The Kinemetrics Altus instruments (K2s, Etnas, and Mt. Whitneys) are very popular with several thousand units
delivered. As such, supporting networks from file based to real-time and near real time systems exist for these
instruments. In some cases, these networks have evolved over the years into very sophisticated systems with a great
deal of capability.

We understand that extending or possibly replacing these networks to support later generation equipment can
represent significant effort and/or cost. To ease the burden, we have included an Altus Emulation module in the
Rockhound software providing the option to make the Rock based digitizer look very much like an Altus instrument so
that you can continue to utilize your existing network with little or no modifications.

Obviously, the emulation is not a 100% duplication of all Altus capabilities in exactly the same way as they are
implemented on the Altus. However, the Altus Emulation module when combined with other modules such as the Altus
EVT Archiver module provides capabilities such as:

Recording in EVT file format


Altus File Naming conventions
Support for Altus-style modem operations
Support for the Altus Serial Data Streams (SDS) protocol
Altus-style terminal mode functions
Support for Altus Block mode

These capabilities allow for operation with the Kinemetrics NMS software, as well as with software such as Earthworm,
Antelope, or customer developed software with little or no modification. In addition, the Altus Emulation modules allow
for:

Support for more than 18 channels


Co-operation with other Rock platform capabilities
More compatible existence between modem modes and streaming data
Multiple Altus Emulation modules can be included in the layout
Multiple streaming data interfaces serving data to multiple destinations

There are two different types of Altus Emulation modules available with very similar features:

Altus Telemetry via RS-232 allows Altus Emulation through any Rock serial port or modem
Altus Telemetry via TCP/IP allows Altus Emulation through IP links

Page 152
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Terminal mode
Terminal mode in Altus Emulation is similar to how it operates in the Altus. A connection is made to the unit via the RS-
232 or TCP/IP. Once connected, you can use commands that are very similar to those in the Altus:

Page 153
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Most of these commands provide approximations to the original Altus command and are intended to be as complete a
reproduction as is reasonable. It is assumed that most users who have occasion to use these commands will be familiar
with the Altus commands on which these emulated commands are based. Additional detail on each command is
supplied here where a command is substantially different than the Altus command else the user is referred to the
appropriate Altus documentation, Altus Monitor Mode Communications, p/n 302219.

At present, the list of commands is as follows:

* help

ALARM - ALARM control functions

ALARM off - Turn off the alarm bit

Alarm bits on Rock digitizers are provided via the Rock GPIO module described in the IO Bits section. The Rock
GPIO module equates the alarm function with one of the available hardware IO bits, which will be triggered
when the threshold is exceeded. This command turns off that output as needed.

ANSWERMODE - Forces hangup of the modem

Also may be used to declare successful termination of a call. The CGS Altus Emulation modules specifically
requires both a SUCCESS command to declare the conversation complete and an ANS command to hangup the
line.

AQ - AQ acquisition control functions

AQ DET Detriggers recording

AQ DVM Displays sensor signal levels

In addition to supporting the standard Altus display of channel voltages and supporting step/unstep mode, this
command also allows display of the enabled state-of-health channels.

AQ FT Performs sensor functional test

AQ ON/OFF Enables or disables acquisition

AQ PEAK Displays signal peaks during trigger

AQ SRT Performs sensor response test

AQ TRI Triggers recording

BATTERY - BATTERY performs a battery test

BAT mins - Performs a battery test for the time in minutes

This command tests functionality of the external battery by internally disconnecting the input DC power, forcing
the system to run off of the battery for the specified amount of time. If the battery does not have sufficient
reserve, this test may cause the system to reset.

Page 154
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

During the test, the system will display the remaining time and current battery voltage as follows:

* bat 2
This will perform a power supply battery test by disconnecting
input DC power, and may cause the system to reboot if the
battery does not have enough reserve.

Are you sure you want to do this? [(Y)es, (N)o]: y


Requesting battery test (120 seconds)

Starting battery test...


SYSTEM RESET indicates test failure
Press any key to abort
Seconds remaining:
32: 12.21V

BLOCK - Forces the connection into block mode

CD - Change Directory command

Allows the user to change subdirectories within the data directories. The root directory of Altus Emulation is
placed at the specified data directory, which is usually /data/events. For security considerations, the user is not
allowed to navigate outside of the data directory and subdirectories.

The exception here is access to firmware files such as log, batch, configuration and script files that are located in
various locations throughout the system. For these, a pseudo directory is created that cannot be directly CDd
to, but instead you may access with commands like dir FW.

CALLMODE - Forces hangup of the modem

CLEAR - CLEAR events and alarms

CLEAR ALL - Clear event counter and alarm

CLEAR EVENT - Clear event counter only

CLEAR ALARM - Clear alarm only

CPPC - CPPC command controls modem power with 2 hour timeout


CPPC on - Turn on the modem power
CPPC off - Turn off the modem power

Page 155
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

DELETE - Delete command - Deletes files singly or in groups

DEL file FW - Deletes rt.log, err.log, and batch files

See notes regarding special firmware files in the description of the CD command.

DIR - Displays storage directory

DIR FW - Displays special files

See notes regarding special firmware files in the description of the CD command.

DISPLAY - DIS displays system parameters

DIS BIT - Displays bit map parameters

DIS CHA - Displays channel parameters

DIS MOD - Displays modem parameters

DIS SEN - Displays sensor parameters

DIS SER - Displays serial data stream parameters

DIS STR - Displays stream parameters

DIS RWM - Displays read/write/miscellaneous

DIS WRI file - Writes parameters to a file

Writes digitizer configuration parameters (extracted from the active config.jar file that holds all current
parameters) to the specified file. Files are written in a human readable format of the form:
*** SYSTEM-WIDE PARAMETERS
Data directory: \data
*** ALTUS EVT FORMAT DATA ARCHIVER
Output directory: \data\events\
Directory layout: FLAT
Channel list: *
Julian Day: false
Separate by digitizer: false
ZIP multiple files: false
Keep ZIP only: false
*** CGS ALTUS TELEMETRY VIA TCP/IP
TCP Port: 9801
Channel list: *
Enable modem use: false
Dial on event: false
Dial on daily checkin: false
etc

Page 156
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

DIS ADV file - Writes parameters (incl advanced) to a file

This command is similar to the DIS WRI command above, but includes advanced parameters normally hidden
to reduce complexity. A sample of some advanced parameters included would be:
Call Window Duration: 15
Call Power Warmup: 0
Compressed mode: true
Buffer size: 0
Simulate Altus naming (Advanced): true
Dynamic Packet sizing (Advanced): 0-Dynamic 2048

EDIT - EDIT command ignored

Edit command as traditionally defined in the Altus is not supported. In general, parameters are contained in the
config.jat configuration file and should be edited using either the web interface or the RockTalk software as
described elsewhere.

As a result, some changes which would normally be made in Altus EDIT mode are available as commands
available from the * prompt. In these cases, the changes to the operation of the system take place
immediately.

EEPROM - EEPROM command - Displays status of board ID EEPROMs

Reads and displays the contents of the ID PROMs associated with the various boards in the system. The output
from this command will take the following form:
* eeprom
PartNumber=112110
DashNumber=01
BoardRev=A
PartsListRev=A
SerialNo=21
Bridge=1
ESerialNo=1C00700903000058
Built=4907
Tested=0108
VendorNumber=49070021
BoardType=BlackFin
BFNumber=0

Page 157
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

GPS - GPS status functions

GPS DIAG on|off|val - Timing system diagnostics


vals: 1=Time reports 2=Time verifies
vals: 4=Time quality 8=Time syncs
vals: 10=Position reports 20=State of health
vals: 40=Satellites & SNRs
Generates Altus-style GPS diagnostic information with some additional information available (such as
time quality). Unlike the Altus though, which provides for all or nothing diagnostic output, the Rock
digitizer allows you to selectively enable and disable different diagnostics by specifying different values
ranging from 0 (nothing) to 7F (everything).

GPS ID - Timing system type and version

GPS OFF - Timing system power off

GPS ON - Timing system power on

GPS STAT - Timing system status

HELP - Displays help on all available commands

MKBATCH - MKBATCH creates a batch file by typing in lines of commands

MKBATCH file - Creates the specified batch file

See Batch Mode

MKDIR - Make directory command - Makes a new subdirectory

MKDIR dir - Makes the subdirectory 'dir'

MODEM - MODEM command - Provides limited modem control parameters

MOD CHE hh mm dd - Sets daily checkin at 'hh:mm', skipping 'dd' days

MOD CHE -1 - Disables daily checkin

MOD HOLD ON - Disables dial-out

Disables dial-out until re-enabled by the user. Status of the hold is shown in the STAT and DIS MOD command
results, as well as in response to the MOD HOLD command without arguments.

MOD HOLD OFF - Enables dial-out

Cancels any modem hold in progress.

MOD PHO n num - Sets modem dial out phone number 'n' (1 or 2) to 'num'

See EDIT command, above. Changes to the operation of the modem take place immediately.

Page 158
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

NWDEFER - NWDEFER Defers network triggering temporarily

When using network triggering, allows the user to temporarily disable outgoing network triggering for
maintenance or test purposes so that interconnected units will not cross-trigger. If the local unit triggers while
network triggers are deferred, then the local unit will still trigger but will not inform other units of the trigger.
Instead, a log entry will be made that indicates the deferral.

NWDEFER secs - Defer network triggering for 'secs' seconds

Time value must be positive. Realistically, there is no maximum time with the maximum being a signed 32 bit
number, so zero to 2,147,483,647 (~68 years).

NWDEFER 0 - Cancel network triggering deferral

NWDEFER - Display current network triggering deferral status

PASSWORD - PASSWORD command unlocks protected commands

PAUSE - PAUSE Pause and wait for user input

Used with batch files to wait for user input. See Batch Mode

Q - Quit command ignored

Exit command from EDIT mode, which is not used. See EDIT command.

RENAME - Rename command - Renames or moves files or directories

REN file file - Renames a file to another name

REN file dir - Moves a file to a directory

REN dir dir - Renames a directory to another name

REN file file FW - Renames rt.log, err.log, and batch files

See notes regarding special firmware files in the description of the CD command.

RMDIR - RMDIR command - Deletes empty directories

See notes regarding special firmware files in the description of the CD command.

RUN - RUN runs a batch file by executing commands

RUN file

See Batch Mode

RX - XMODEM Receive command

Page 159
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

SLEEP - SLEEP Sleep the specified number of seconds

SLEEP seconds

Used with batch files to delay a specified amount of time. See Batch Mode

STATUS - Reports current status information

SUCCESS - Causes completion of call by clearing dial-out reasons

Only available with the CGS Altus Emulation modules.

Used to declare successful termination of a call. The CGS Altus Emulation modules specifically requires both a
SUCCESS command to declare the conversation complete and an ANS command to hangup the line.

SUM - Displays event file summaries

SYSTEM - SYS performs system operations

SYS REBOOT - Reboots the Operating System

Reboots the entire system including the underlying Operating System.

SYS RES - System reset reboots Rockhound

Restarts just the application section of the system, without rebooting the Operating System.

TIME - TIME sets or displays system time

TIME - Displays current time

TIME yy mm dd hh mm ss

TX - XMODEM Transmit command

VERSION - Reports version information

Example:
* ver
ROCK Digitizer Software 3.1.2
P/N 304708
Copyright (c) 2009, Kinemetrics, Inc.
Last Revised: July 9, 2009

BF0; BF=0.1.76,CalPSOC=0006,CPBL=0002B,CPLD=nc/nc/nc/nc
BF0; BF @ 090225 11:11 0176 ::

Page 160
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

WINDOW - WINDOW manages timed recording windows

WIN NEW - Defines a new timed recording window

WIN DEL x - Deletes a timed recording window

WIN - Lists all current timed recording windows

Used to create and manage timed recording windows. The user can create timed windows for one time or daily
repetition, and can list or delete windows as needed. Examples:
* win new
Duration (sec): 90
Hour (0-23): 11
Minute (0-59): 43
Daily? (Y/N): n
Month (1-12): 3
Day (1-31): 29
Year (2008-2099): 2010
1: Mar 29, 2010 11:43, Duration 90 secs
* win new
Duration (sec): 120
Hour (0-23): 13
Minute (0-59): 30
Daily? (Y/N): y
1: Mar 29, 2010 11:43, Duration 90 secs
2: Jul 14, 2009 13:30, Duration 120 secs (DAILY)
* win
1: Mar 29, 2010 11:43, Duration 90 secs
2: Jul 15, 2009 13:30, Duration 120 secs (DAILY)
* win del 2
Deleted timed recording window 2

\\\ - Forces command mode - Ignored in command mode

Batch Mode
Altus emulated command mode supports a limited batch mode process to make it somewhat easier to perform routine
activities such as periodic maintenance. The MKBATCH command is used to create a batch file by name, accepting input
until RETURN only is entered. Lines of the file are executed as commands as if typed by the user. Lines starting with ;
or # are treated as comments and ignored.

The batch file will be created with the extension .BAT on the digitizer. Batch files can also be uploaded or downloaded
using the TX and RX commands with the FW qualifier.

For example:

* mkbatch mybatch
Type in lines of commands, one command per line.
When done, press RETURN only to close the file.
> ; Quarterly Maintenance
> ; Get overall unit status

Page 161
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

> stat
> ; Get GPS status
> gps stat
> ; Do a 2 minute battery test
> bat 2
> ; Hangup
> ans
> ; Wait a bit
> sleep 30
> ; Generate an FT, which should call back
> aq ft
>
Batch file creation complete.
*
To run the batch file, type:

* run mybatch

Streaming
Streaming Data is simulated from the Altus Emulation module. Parameters for Streaming Data include:

Channel selection
Buffer size
Data compression mode
Port selection and baud rate are available when using the RS-232 versions of the module

Dial On Event
Similar to the Altus, dialing options are provided which are set within the modules parameters and include:

Phone numbers
Initialization and modem control strings
Dialing reasons (event, loss of GPS, low battery, etc)
Call completion mode
Call retries and retry delays
Daily checkin
Modem power control windows
Call transaction log entries (into system log)

Page 162
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Modem Only Operation


Although primarily designed as an IP-based instrument, the Rock digitizer can be used in a modem only operation mode
allowing for complete command and control of the unit using only a modem. The basic capabilities of this mode of
operation are outlined here.

The TTYMonitor

The TTYMonitor provides a protection mechanism to allow you to access a Rock digitizer even if the Rockhound
software is rendered inoperative. This is important because the Altus Emulation module that controls the modem runs
as part of the Rockhound layout. If the layouts parameter were corrupted or inadvertently set up in such a way that the
system could not run, then you would be unable to access the system through the modem.

The TTYMonitor is a software layer that is between the Altus Emulation module and the underlying Operating System.
Simply put, when you call the modem it is the TTYMonitor software that first answers the call. If you simply begin the
conversation with the unit, then TTYMonitor transparently passes all characters directly to and from Rockhound.

If however, the Rockhound software is unable to operate, you would call the unit and after TTYMonitor answers the call
you would send a $ to the system, which TTYMonitor interprets as a request to directly access the Operating System. In
this case you will be presented with a Linux login prompt. From the prompt, you can log into Linux and reset or correct
the problems encountered.

Setting up to use TTYMonitor is fairly simple and involves two basic steps:

From Linux you run the ttymonconfig script to associate the modems TTY port and an IP port.

From Rockhound you use the TCP/IP version of the Altus Emulation module and choose the same IP port.

Running ttymonconfig would look as follows:

ttymonconfig
Enter the tty device
Default: /dev/ttyS3
> /dev/ttyS3
Enter the modem init string
Default: ATZE0S0=1
> ATZE0&C1&D0S0=1

Page 163
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Enter the application port number (5001-65534)


Default: 9800
> 9800
Review the new parameters:
TTY_DEV = /dev/ttyS3
MODEM_INIT = ATZE0&C1&D0S0=1
APP_PORT = 9800
Press [Enter] to Continue, or [Ctrl-c] to Quit.
Save the parameters?
(Y/N)? > y
Saving parameters...
Auto-start the service at boot?
(Y/N)? > y
Stopping KMI TTY Monitor Service: /usr/sbin/ttymond: line 61: 518 Terminated ttywatch
$APP_READ_FIFO $APP_WRITE_FIFO <$TTY_DEV >$TTY_DEV
ttymond: Stopped!
Ok
Enabling auto-start...
Starting KMI TTY Monitor Service: Ok
ttymond: Monitoring tty /dev/ttyS3 and port 9800...

Page 164
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Next you must add the Altus Emulation module via TCP/IP to your layout and configure it to use port 9800 as follows:

Obviously, you will want to test your system for the ability dial in and dial out before leaving the premises.

Page 165
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

NOTE: Use of TTYMonitor is strongly recommended if the modem will be the only interface to your
unit. We feel this is important enough that if you use the RS-232 version of the Altus Emulation
module and set it up for modem use then it WILL NOT OPERATE without specific additional setup. This
is to protect you by reducing the possibility of field visits if the Rockhound software or configuration is
rendered inoperable by configuration errors.

If you add the RS-232 version of the Altus Emulation module and enable modem mode, the modem features will not
work at all and you will see the following message in the log file:

ERROR! Modem enabled as primary connection

If you wish to utilize the RS-232 version of the Altus Emulation module directly because you have a secondary IP or
modem connection (or if youre just willing to take the risk), then specify the connection as a secondary connection as
shown. Note the detailed warning below:

Dialing In

Dialing in to the Rock through the modem interface is the same as the Altus. Once the modem connects, you must give
one or more backslash characters (\) depending on what the unit is doing, and you will then be presented with a
command prompt that allows you to enter commands.

File Transfer

File transfers through the modem interface can be performed using the XMODEM RX and TX commands or using Altus
block mode. Altus block mode allows you to use Altus QuickTalk or Altus File Assistant software to transfer files.

Page 166
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Parameter Download

To download your parameters through the modem, use the TX command with the FW qualifier to download
config.jar as follows:

TX config.jar FW

Other special file types that can be transferred using the TX FW mechanism include:

Unit configuration (config.jar)


Batch files (.bat)
Log files (rt.log, err.log, or system.log)
Sensor script files (.csq)
Special configuration files (.cfg)

Editing Parameters with RockTalk

The RockTalk program can be used to edit parameters you have manually retrieved from the digitizer with the TX
command. To do this, configure RockTalk to support Configuration Archival (see the section on RockTalk ).

Select the de-archival function through the button or File De-archive Layout or the toolbar button:

Page 167
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Locate the jar file that contains the configuration that you downloaded from the unit and make the necessary changes
using the Parameter Editor or other functions of RockTalk. Once the changes have been made, save the modified
configuration by selecting File Archive Layout or by using the toolbar button:

Once youve saved the modified configuration in a file, you can send it back to the digitizer over the modem using the RX
command as described below.

Parameter Upload

To upload your parameters through the modem, use the RX command with the FW qualifier to upload config.jar as
follows:

RX config.jar FW

After you have successfully uploaded the configuration, issue the sys res command to install the uploaded
configuration.

NOTE: It may take as long as a minute or two for the Rockhound software to shutdown, unpack the
new configuration and restart before the system is back in full operation.

Other special file types that can be transferred using the RX FW mechanism include:

Firmware files (update.jar)


Unit configuration (config.jar)
Batch files (.bat)
Sensor script files (.csq)
Special configuration files (.cfg)

Page 168
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Installing Firmware Updates

To upload a firmware update through the modem, use the RX command with the FW qualifier to upload update.jar
as follows:

RX update.jar FW

After you have successfully uploaded the firmware, issue the sys res command to install the uploaded firmware.

NOTE: It may take as long as five minutes for the Rockhound software to shutdown, unpack the new
firmware, install it, and restart before the system is back in full operation.

The updated firmware file MUST be named update.jar in order to be installed.

Page 169
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

FAQs
What is dig1?
Sometimes in looking at the parameters or other information, youll see dig1. This represents the current digitizer (for
example, your digitizer). This is used because the general Rockhound software is capable of collecting data from more
than one digitizer (as is sometimes done when Rockhound is run on a PC or on a Slate).

It would also be possible and useful in some applications to collect data from another digitizer (such as a Q330 or a K2)
and collect and process it within the digitizer. In this case, the digitizer would be dig1, and a second digitizer would be
dig2.

Changing trigger levels


To change trigger levels, use the web interface to open System Operation parameters, and then locate the trigger for the
selected virtual channel:

Page 170
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Trigger levels are the level at which the system will decide that a channel is triggered and that it should contribute that
channels votes toward triggering the entire system. By default, the system uses threshold triggers, which are set as a
percentage of full scale. So if your full scale range is +/-20V and your threshold is set to 2%, then your trigger level is 2%
of 20V, or 0.4V.

After completing your changes, be sure to press OK to save your changes.

Once you have completed your parameter changes, activate the completed parameter changes by selecting Apply
Changes Now from the left pane of the display.

Using Different Triggers or Trigger Filters


To use a different type of trigger (e.g. an STA/LTA trigger rather than a Threshold Trigger), or to use a different trigger
filter (e.g. an IIR Filter rather than the Classic Strong Motion Filter), you need to replace the corresponding modules in
the layout. Note that you can select different triggers and different trigger filters for each virtual channel. For example,
to replace the Threshold Trigger for virtual channel 3 with an STA/LTA Trigger, use the web interface. Choose Advanced
Features from the left side of the display. Select Module Replacement and click OK:

Page 171
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

On the left pane of the screen, Module Replacement will now be an option below Advanced Features:

Page 172
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Click Module Replacement and youll see:

Page 173
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Click Replace for the Channel 3 Threshold Trigger and youll see your choices:

Page 174
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

If you select Choose next to STA/LTA, then youll replace the Threshold Trigger for channel 3 only. If you select All,
youll get a chance to replace all Threshold Triggers in the system with STA/LTA Triggers. If you select All, then the
Module Replacement screen will now look like this:

Once you have completed your parameter changes, activate the completed parameter changes by selecting Apply
Changes Now from the left pane of the display.

Page 175
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Adding Channels
Strictly speaking, you cannot add channels to an existing layout.

If your requirement for additional channels is something that you expect to change once and then not change for quite
some time (for example, if a newly deployed unit will be shared between two agencies one requiring data at one
sample rate, and another at a different sample rate), then the approach is to rebuild the layout using the Layout Wizard.
Tell the Layout Wizard (for example) that the unit has 12 physical channels and 24 virtual channels. Use the Channel
Mapping feature to assign the virtual channels to each physical channel at two different sample rates. For example:

Physical Virtual

1 1 Physical 1 at 100sps
2 2 Physical 2 at 100sps
3 3 Physical 3 at 100sps
4 4 Physical 4 at 100sps
1 5 Physical 1 at 10sps
2 6 Physical 2 at 10sps
3 7 Physical 3 at 10sps
4 8 Physical 4 at 10sps
etc

The Layout Wizard will also add Channel Extractors, Trigger Filters, and Triggers for the duplicated channels. You can
either:

Delete the unneeded modules (probably the best choice)

-or-

Set the voters for the unneeded channels to zero

Finally, for recording purposes, youll have to decide whether to record all channels at both sample rates when there is a
trigger, or to limit recording to only one set of channels, using the Channel List parameter.

Page 176
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

A Channel List of * will record all channels. A channel list of dig1:1, dig1:2 dig1:12 will record only the first 12
channels.

Page 177
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

If you expect to have some channels that you want to record some times, but not at others, then you still need to
recreate the layout, but you can then turn channels on and off by going to the Chanel Mapping selections for the
channels you want to change and selecting disabled:

See Layout Wizard.

Page 178
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Switching Between Layouts


If you will sometimes operate in one mode, and then another time operate in a completely different mode, you can save
two or more layouts by keeping a copy of the layout and the parameter configuration for each, all of which is kept in a
single file called config.jar.

The first thing you need to do is to build a layout and configure the parameters the way you want them to be. Then,
from the web interface use the Advanced Features function Administrative Details, download and save a copy of the
parameters. At the top of the Administrative Details screen, there is a link Click Here to download parameters. You can
give this file you are saving a name that is meaningful to you such as event-recorder-at-10sps-and200sps.jar.

Repeat this process with as many system configurations as you need.

To put a layout that youve saved back on the system, use the web interface via the Advanced Features function
Administrative Details. Select the function Send Parameters, and then select the file to send and after it is sent, press
Validate:

Page 179
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Changing Output Data Formats


The Rockhound-based digitizers do not require you to use a single data format. They are not, for example restricted to
creation of just EVT files, or just MiniSEED, or any other single format. To use a different data format for created files
than that currently configured, you need to replace the corresponding data archiver module in the layout. For example,
to change the data format from Kinemetrics EVT file format to MiniSEED, use the web interface. Choose Advanced
Features from the left side of the display. Select Module Replacement and click OK:

Page 180
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

On the left pane of the screen, Module Replacement will now be an option below Advanced Features:

Page 181
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Click Module Replacement and youll see:

Page 182
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Click Replace for the Altus EVT Format Data Archiver and youll see your choices:

Page 183
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

If you select Choose next to MiniSEED Format Data Archiver, then youll replace the Altus EVT Format Data Archiver
with MiniSEED. The Module Replacement screen will now look like this:

Once you have completed your parameter changes, activate the completed parameter changes by selecting Apply
Changes Now from the left pane of the display.

Page 184
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Timed Recording
Timed recording is done by triggering the system using an Alarm Clock module.

The module reads a set of configured times that will cause an action to occur at specified times according to Days of the
Week, Days of the Month, Times of Day, or Alarm minute interval parameters.

When an alarm clock is triggered, the Alarm Clocks "Alarm message" parameter will be sent to the system just as if it
had been typed in by the user at the Rockhound Console.

Parameters used are:

" Days of the Week " - Space separated days of the week (M T W TH F SA SU)

" Days of the Month " - Space separated days of the month (1 2 3 ... 31)

" Times of Day " - Space separated times of day (2:15 15:54)

" Alarm minute interval " - Minute interval between alarm actions. If used alone, one alarm action will be
generated immediately (assuming no conflict with the Days of the Week or Days of the Month parameters),
and the next one generated the number of minutes specified from the current time.

" Alarm message " - Message to be sent when the alarm clock triggers. This message should be specified as a
command, such as "KBTRI 600".

NOTE: Alarm minute interval parameter is not limited to small numbers. For example, it could be used
to indicate alarm actions every 5 minutes, 360 minutes (6 hours), or 129600 minutes (90 days).

NOTE: If Alarm minute interval is used in conjunction with the Times of Day parameter, indicates
minute intervals relative to the first Times of Day parameter, which will act as the base time. In this
case, once the base time is set, the Times of Day parameters will be overridden and ignored.

Examples:

To record 10 minutes of data every 3 days at 2:16 pm:

Times of Day =14:16

Alarm minute interval =4320

Alarm message =KBTRI 600

Page 185
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

To record 10 minutes of data every Monday and Friday at 8:00 am:

Times of Day =8:00

Days of the Week =M F

Alarm message = KBTRI 600

To record 10 minutes of data once an hour on the hour:

Times of Day =12:00

Alarm minute interval =60

Alarm message = KBTRI 600

To record 10 minutes of data on the first and 15th of the month at 8:00 am:

Days of the Month =1 15

Times of Day =8:00

Alarm message = KBTRI 600

To do timed recording for 60 seconds at 8:00 am and 2:00pm every day:

Times of Day =8:00 14:00

Alarm message =KBTRI 60

Page 186
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

See the section Adding Modules for the procedure on how to add a new module into the system. Once added to the
system, the parameters for the Alarm Clock module can be found in the System Operation parameters and can be edited
as shown here:

Remember that multiple Alarm Clock modules may be added to the system to record at different times.

Page 187
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Network Triggering
The Rock family digitizers support interconnected triggers over a network connection. This interconnect mechanism is
network based only and is not compatible with earlier TRIG-IN/TRIG-OUT interconnect schemes such as those used in
the Altus.

The factory default Rock digitizer event recorder configuration includes a Network Trigger module, but you may choose
to add the module manually should you choose to build your own layout. Adding the Network Trigger module is done
similarly to how other modules are added to the layout. See the section Adding Modules. Note that only one Network
Trigger module may be added to the system.

The Network Trigger module parameters can be found in System Operation:

The default behavior of the Network Trigger module is that it is assigned one vote to trigger the system.

Without making any further edits, Rock digitizers on the same local network will discover each other and will
automatically trigger one another. So if one unit triggers due to a console trigger, seismic trigger, timed recording, or
sensor test, then all interconnected units will trigger.

Page 188
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Please note that since triggering is done through the network that trigger times may not be exactly the same on all units,
though they will be close typically within a second or two.

Other considerations:

Enabling Slave Triggering will allow the unit to respond to triggers from other interconnected units, but will not
generate outbound triggers.
Sensor tests will forward the type of trigger to other units so for example all interconnected units will perform
sensor tests.
In some cases, you may wish to perform a console trigger or sensor test on one unit during maintenance and
NOT want to cause triggers on all interconnected units. To allow for this, you can use the console command
NWDEFER secs to defer network triggering for a specified amount of time. For example, NWDEFER 300
would give you 5 minutes to perform your tests with the interconnection temporarily disabled. After five
minutes, interconnection would automatically be re-enabled.
The Excluded hosts lists allow you to manually specify units within the local network that should NOT be treated
as part of the interconnection.
The Included hosts lists allow you to manually specify units outside of the local network that are to be included.
For example, units might be interconnected from within two separate networks. An example might be two units
located at opposite ends of a very long bridge that are connected to separate networks. By giving each unit the
others addresses in the Included hosts list they will be able to communicate with each other and command
interconnected triggers.

Telemetry Options
The overall design of the Rockhound software allows for many optional modules. Some of these modules include
options for telemetry (real time data streams). Presently the modules available to support this capability include (but are
not limited to):

The Telemetry Connection module used to produce the Waveform Data displays. See Waveform Viewing.
The Altus-style Serial Data Streams (SDS) protocol is supported through the Altus Emulation modules.
The low-latency DFS telemetry stream is supported through an optional DFS telemetry option board for
channels 1 through 4.
A Ring Buffer module, compatible with BRTTs Antelope software is a specially authorized module.

Page 189
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Advanced Operation
The Rockhound software provides for several advanced features that allow the user to add, remove and replace
modules, allow access to advanced and/or test mode parameters, allow for initial layout creation and other special
capabilities.

Layout Wizard
The Layout Wizard allows you to create a completely new layout for your system. During this process, you can define the
source of the data (on a Rock Digitizer, the source will be a Rock Data Interface), as well as defining the types of triggers,
output formats, and so on.

In the example here well create a 12 channel event recorder and add the Network Triggering.

To start, choose Advanced Features and select Layout Wizard:

Page 190
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Then from the left pane, choose Layout Wizard, and then select Create Layout:

Youll get the following warning:

Page 191
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Once you select Yes, youll be asked if you want to save any parameters possible from the existing layout. Your answer
depends on how close the layout is expected to be to the current one. In this case well select Yes:

NOTE: If the Layout Wizard does not download files, it may be that port 80 access is restricted by your
Anti-Virus software. See Web Servers Layout Wizard Doesnt Transmit Files

First question about the new layout is to choose the basic type of layout. There are four basic types: Simple (only one
data source), Complex (more than one data source), Event Recorder (triggered recording), or Continuous Recording (no
triggering). To record event data on a Rock Digitizer, select Simple Event Recorder:

Next, specify the number of physical channels (actual hardware channels):

Page 192
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Next select the number of virtual channels. To record 12 channels as a single sample rate, select 12. If you wanted to
record 12 channels at two different sample rates, youd select 24. In this case well select 12:

Select the data source, in this case a Rock Data Interface:

Select the type of trigger filter:

Page 193
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Youll now be asked if you want to use the same type of filter on all channels. If so, select Yes and you can avoid the
next 11 questions about filters. If you select No, youll have to choose the filter for each of the 12 channels:

Choose the type of trigger used:

Again, youll be asked if all channels will use the same type of trigger:

Page 194
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Next, choose the output data format:

At this point, the basic layout is complete:

Page 195
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Press Send Created Layout:

Youll get another informational warning:

Page 196
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Youll be asked for the SCP login and password. You can choose to save the login information on your local machine if
you like:

Youll be given this notification when the transfer is complete:

Page 197
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Go back to Advanced Features and enable Module Add/Remove and Password Editing:

Page 198
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Then click OK and select Module Add from the left pane:

Select Network Trigger by pressing the Add button. Since only one of these can be added to the layout, the choice will
disappear from the list of available modules.

Select System Operation and Passwords from the left pane and you will get a warning:

The warning is because passwords will be sent in the parameter data. Ideally you should not do this over the internet
routinely or you will expose your web access passwords. If you are not specifically editing passwords, we recommend

Page 199
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

that you use the System Operation function instead to edit parameters. If you need to edit the passwords (which you
will need to do in order to initially set up the web server password) click OK and youll get the parameter map:

Page 200
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Select Config/Control Web Server from the parameter map to get to the parameters for the web server. At a minimum,
youll need to set the passwords for Admin and/or Client level users. Passwords are set as a comma separated list of
username and password pairs. For example, user1:pwd1,user2:pwd2. To set the Admin level username to rock and
the password to kmi, enter rock:kmi:

Click OK to save your changes.

Page 201
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Were almost done with the layout configuration. Add any additional modules that you need and verify parameters such
as sample rates, voltage ranges and others as described in Basic Setup. Once all changes have been made, select Apply
Changes Now from the left pane:

In a few minutes, the system will have restarted and will be operational with your new layout.

Configuration Options
There are other configuration features that can be used to customize your Rock digitizer outside of the Rockhound
configuration. These additional features are briefly described in this section.

Network Parameters

You can set the network parameters for your digitizer using the netconfig script from Linux. This script allows you to
set IP addresses, as well as other related parameters such as the use of DHCP, setting the net mask, gateway, and DNS
servers.

The netconfig script is more fully described in the NetConfig section.

Modem Configuration

The digitizer can use any available internal modem or serial port as a modem. These modems may be managed by the
Rockhound software using a module such as the Altus Emulation modules or the Alpha-Numeric Pager or SMS Message
Sender modules, or they can be controlled directly by Linux.

If you will use a modem as your only external access to the digitizer, it is strongly recommended that you make use of
the TTYMonitor function. This feature exists logically between a modem connection and a module such as Altus
Emulation. Should the Rockhound software by unable to respond for whatever reason, the TTYMonitor allows you to
directly obtain a Linux login prompt through the modem connection so that you can communicate with the system to
correct the problem.

See the section on TTYMonitor for more detail.

Page 202
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

IO Bits

There are general purpose outputs available in the digitizer. Two outputs are available on each of up to three dual serial
port option cards. These are provided to perform such functions as alarm outputs (indicating alarm level threshold
exceedance), or for control of external devices such as powering an external modem or radio.

The various Rockhound modules activate these signals logically by name. For example:

The Alarm Exceedance logic drives a signal named AlarmGPIO


The Modem power logic drives a signal named ModemPwrGPIO
A heartbeat drives a signal named HeartbeatGPIO

In order to connect these logical signals to actual hardware bits, you will need to add an additional module named
Rock GPIO to the layout:

Page 203
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

The modules parameters allow you to connect each logical signal to any of the up to six physical hardware bits available
as shown here:

Bits 1 and 4 are assigned to the dual serial card in the right-most option slot. Bits 2 and 5 are assigned to the dual serial
card in the middle option slot, and bits 3 and 6 are assigned to the dual serial card in the left-most option slot.
Depending on the external hardware connected to the bit, they may be logically inverted or utilized directly.

Page 204
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Point of Contact

Digitizers connected to the internet will often make use of lower cost dynamic IP connections. One problem with these
connections is that the addresses they exist at can and will change. This means that from the outside you cannot know
where they are located and therefore cannot connect to them remotely.

To address this problem, the digitizer includes a Point of Contact service (also called POC). POC periodically sends a
message to a third party POC Server which keeps track of the current addresses of all reporting digitizers.

To access a particular digitizer, you would connect to the web server provided by the POC Server to see the available
units:

Page 205
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Each unit is shown with an icon indicating current status as well as its name and tag number. Clicking on a units icon
displays further details from the unit:

Icons are provided within this detail page providing links to the units web server, as well as an SFTP connection for
secure file retrieval and maintenance, and an SSH connection for a secure Linux login and command session.

Note at the top right of the POC Servers web page that you may select the units internal IP address (within a local
network) or its external address (from outside of a router).

By default, all Rock digitizers send POC messages to www.kmipoc.com. If you set up a POC account through Kinemetrics,
you will be provided with a username and password that allows you to designate certain units as belonging to you,
allowing you to access them from the POC server. The account will allow you to access only your own units so you will
not see those belonging to others (and others will not see your units).

Page 206
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

The POC server software is available from Kinemetrics should you choose to set up and maintain your own POC server.
The POC service on the digitizer can then be reconfigured to send messages to your own POC server instead of, or in
addition to the Kinemetrics POC server. The service can also be disabled.

The script for configuring the POC service on your digitizer is pocconfig, and operates as follows:

[root@GRANITE:~]# pocconfig
Primary Server (or type NONE)
Default: kmipoc.com
> kmipoc.com
Secondary Server
Default: NONE
>
Review the new pocnotifyd parameters:
SERVER1 = kmipoc.com
PORT1 = 8411
PASS_PHRASE1 = KMIROCKPOC
SERVER2 = NONE
PORT2 =
PASS_PHRASE2 =
Press [Enter] to Continue, or [Ctrl-c] to Quit.
Save the parameters?
(Y/N)? > y
Stopping KMI Point Of Contact Notification Service: Ok
Saving parameters...
Enabling auto-start...
Starting KMI Point Of Contact Notification Service: Ok

Page 207
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Keeping Time

Time keeping is an important part of the Rock digitizer and is performed at a number of levels:

Digitizer data time is set at data acquisition start by sending current system time to the ADC boards. This time is
used to time stamp data until a better time source is available such as GPS or TOE (Time Over Ethernet). GPS and
TOE time sources are very accurate typically much less than a microsecond and are used to time-stamp
acquired samples, telemetry and data files.
Time is set and maintained in the main processor based on time received from NTP (network time protocol) by
communicating with any of several default internet time servers. You can also specify the NTP server to use by
using the Linux script timeconfig.
NOTE! The NTP protocol DOES NOT provide sufficient accuracy or determinism for precise data
acquisition timing. It is used ONLY to set the Operating System time and to pre-load the time used
by the data acquisition system until good time can be acquired by GPS or TOE.
Time is saved in the systems internal clock at power down and will maintain time without any external power
for at least seven days. This time will be restored at reboot in absence of any other time.
Should the internal clock time source be lost, the time at boot will be the time of the last proper shutdown.
Time can be set manually from the Linux date command

The timeconfig script operates as follows:

System time is:


Tue Feb 12 17:14:00 UTC 2008
Do you want to set the system time manually?
(Y/N)? > n
Do you want to specify an NTP server?
(Y/N)? > y
Enter the IP address or complete host name of the NTP server
> www.myntp.com

Page 208
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Networking and Security


The Rock digitizer provides standard SSH services as well as most standard IP services.

The following services are enabled by default:

SSH
NTP
PING
POC
The following services are disabled by default:

TELNET
FTP
TFTP
The TELNET and FTP services can easily be enabled if needed using the inetdconf script. See the IP Services section.

Page 209
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Software Maintenance & Service


In this section we discuss recommended maintenance and service procedures.

The Rock digitizer contains no user replaceable fuses or internal batteries.

Powering Up the System


To successfully deploy your digitizer, you will need to physically install the hardware in a suitable environment, provide
your primary and backup power sources (if any), connect any communications links used, and configure the software for
correct operation if the needed setup differs from the default factory configuration of the unit. When power is applied
to the system, it goes through a specific power up sequence.

When power is connected via the external DC supply:

All LEDs off - This is the initial condition


Status LED red/green - There may be a brief period (1-2 seconds) where the status LED alternates between red
and green as the system voltages are initially enabled and sensed.
Status LED green - The system is in its initial power up phase and is allowing the system to stabilize (this phase
also prevents system motorboating in case the power input is marginal or erratic)
Status LED orange - The system is charging the supercapacitor pack
Power and Status LEDs blinking - The system is starting up the processor
Status LED off - System operation normal
Power LED on - The processor has started and is running from external DC
Ethernet LEDs active - Ethernet interfaces are enabled
When power is connected via the battery only:

All LEDs off - This is the initial condition


Status LED red/green - There may be a brief period (1-2 seconds) where the status LED alternates between red
and green as the system voltages are initially enabled and sensed.
Status LED green - The system is in its initial power up phase and is allowing the system to stabilize (this phase
also prevents system motorboating in case the power input is marginal or erratic)
Status LED orange - The system is charging the supercapacitor pack
Power and Status LEDs blinking - The system is starting up the processor
Status LED off - System operation normal
Power LED blinks infrequently - The processor has started and is running from battery
Ethernet LEDs active - Ethernet interfaces are enabled

Powering Down the System


When input power is lost, the system goes through a specific power down sequence:

Power LED - Remains in its last state


Status LED alternates - Alternating red and green indicates that the system is powering down
All LEDs off - The system has powered off
Ethernet LEDs off - Ethernet interfaces are disabled

Page 210
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Software Installation
Initial setup of your unit will require you to modify or at least review the software configuration. Every attempt has been
made to have the default behavior of the unit be as useful as possible, or at least rational. However, each deployment
has its own variations and may require configuration changes in order to be best used.

Setting up the unit will require the use of a Serial/USB cable that supports the Console port connection. You'll also need
a PC or equivalent running a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal or PuTTY on Windows or minicom on
Linux.

You may need to use a USB to serial adapter if your PC does not have an available COM port. If so, install the software
and then plug in the adapter, making note of the COM port assigned to the port.

Kinemetrics includes the PuTTY application as an alternative to using HyperTerminal on Windows, or if you are using an
Operating System (such as Windows Vista) that does not supply HyperTerminal. Please see the Tools section that
includes a basic description of PuTTY setup and operation.

Set the terminal emulation program up for 38400 baud, no flow control, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity.

Factory Configuration Including:

Eth0 Enabled for DHCP


Eth1 Disabled
SSH Enabled
NTP Enabled
PING Enabled
TELNET Disabled
FTP Disabled
TFTP Disabled
CF1 Card (2.4) /dev/hda1 mounted as '/', /dev/hda2 mounted as '/opt'

CF Card (2.6) rootfs mounted as /, /dev/sda2 mounted as /opt


SD Card (If Present) /dev/mmca mounted as '/mnt/sd'
Console /dev/console
Serial 1 /dev/ttyS0
Serial 2 /dev/ttyS3
Serial 3 /dev/ttyS4
Serial 4 /dev/ttyS5
Virtual Memory 64MB

Page 211
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

The unit includes an overall configuration menu to assist you with some of the most common configuration tasks. To
access this menu, type the command sysconfig from the Linux prompt. ( The links will take you to explanations of
these functions in this document. )

KMI System Configuration Utility


1. View System Info
2. Software Versions
3. Configure System Time
4. Configure Network
5. Change Passwords
6. View Update Log
7. Query PSU Parameter
8. Modify PSU Parameters
9. Update PSU Firmware
98. REBOOT
99. Exit
Make a selection and press [Enter]

Auto Mount
The system supports multiple memory cards. Most of these will need to be configured before they can be used.

The exception is the primary Compact Flash card (CF1), which is configured and ready as soon as the system starts.
Technically, CF1 is mounted as the root file system, and uses the EXT3 (journaling) Linux file system so that it is less
vulnerable to problems caused by improper operating system shut downs.

The optional SD card and the optional secondary Compact Flash card (CF2) are checked at system startup. If these cards
are present, the system will attempt to mount them. If the cards are not present, or are not mountable (e.g., they are
corrupted), then they will not be mounted.

Removable Media
The system supports multiple memory cards. Most of these will need to be configured before they can be used. Your
unit may or may not be configured with removable memory cards.

The system supports removable media such as optional SD or secondary Compact Flash cards. These cards are mounted
automatically at start up if inserted.

Located near the SD card is a Media Request Switch and a Media Safe red LED.

OFF = media is operational ON = media is not operational, safe to insert or removed.

If removable media are currently inserted and mounted, the Media Safe LED will be off. To remove the media, press the
Media Request Switch. The Media Safe LED will flash as the system attempts to dismount the media this takes about 5
seconds. If the media is successfully dismounted, the LED will remain lit and the card may be safely removed. If the
dismount fails (for example if there are files open on the media), the LED will remain off, indicating that it is NOT safe to
remove the card.

Page 212
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

If removable media are to be inserted and mounted, insert the media and press the Media Request Switch. The Media
Safe LED will flash as the system attempts to mount the media this takes about 5 seconds. If the media is successfully
mounted, the LED will remain off and the card is operational, ready for use. If the mount fails (for example if the card is
corrupted), the LED will remain lit, indicating that the card is not mounted, and is (already) safe to remove.

IP Services
The following IP services are enabled by default from the Kinemetrics factory:

SSH
NTP
PING
The following services are disabled by default but can be enabled if needed:
TELNET
FTP
TFTP
Non-secure services (like TELNET and FTP) should be disabled or only used where network security is not in question
(such as a protected private network). Although these services use passwords, the user names and passwords are sent
"in the clear" meaning that any third party who happens to be listening can capture the needed information to
compromise your system.
To change the IP services configuration, run the inetdconf script after logging onto the unit through the console port
as root.

inetdconf allows you to configure, enable and disable some common IP services such as FTP, TELNET, and TFTP.

The inetdconf exchange will look something like the following:

# inetdconf ftp on
ftp service enabled.

-or-

# inetdconf ftp off


ftp service disabled.

-or-

# inetdconf ftp status


ftp service is currently disabled.

After completing IP services configuration, it is recommended that you reboot the system to ensure that the services
come up correctly.

Page 213
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Network Configuration
The default network configuration is as follows:

Ethernet 1 (eth0): Enabled, DHCP


Ethernet 2 (eth1): Disabled

To change the network configuration, run the netconfig script after logging onto the unit through the console port as
root.

netconfig allows you to set up the IP address, netmask, gateway, DNS servers, and other basic networking
parameters of your primary and (if available) secondary Ethernet connections.

The netconfig exchange will look something like the following:

Network Host Name for this unit

> Rock103

Network Domain Name

>

(RETURN if no domain used)

Mode for eth0

1. disabled

2. static

3. dhcp

Make a selection and press [Enter]

> 2

IP Address for eth0

> 10.0.1.205

NetMask for eth0

Default: 255.255.255.0

>

Page 214
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Default gateway

Default: 10.0.1.1

> 10.0.1.200

Do you want eth0 to Auto-Start at reboot?(Y/N)?

> y

Mode for eth1

1. disabled

2. static

3. dhcp

Make a selection and press [Enter]

> 1

IP Address for primary DNS

> 10.0.1.2

IP Address for secondary DNS

> 10.0.1.222

Review the new parameters.

HOSTNAME = Rock103

DOMAINNAME =

eth0 Parameters:

MODE = static

ADDR = 10.0.1.205

NETMASK = 255.255.255.0

GATEWAY = 10.0.1.200

eth1 Parameters:

MODE = disabled

ADDR =

NETMASK =

Page 215
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

DNS Parameters:

DNS1 = 10.0.1.2

DNS2 = 10.0.1.222

Press [Enter] to Continue, or [Ctrl-c] to Quit.

Save the parameters?

(Y/N)? > Y

Do you want to stop and re-start the network NOW?(Y/N)?

> Y

Stopping network...

Starting network...

Done - Remember to verify your network operation.

After completing the network setup, it is recommended that you reboot the system to ensure that the network
parameters come up correctly. Rebooting also assures proper operation of system services that may be terminated
when the network(s) are stopped.

To review current network parameters, type ifconfig as follows:

root@Rock103:~# ifconfig

eth0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:30:23:00:00:03


inet addr:10.0.1.205 Bcast:10.255.255.255 Mask:255.255.255.0
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:214206 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:796 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:100
RX bytes:16476666 (15.7 Mb) TX bytes:0 (0.0 b)
Interrupt:50 Base address:0x300
Lo Link encap:Local Loopback
inet addr:127.0.0.1 Mask:255.0.0.0
UP LOOPBACK RUNNING MTU:16436 Metric:1
RX packets:6 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:6 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:0
RX bytes:732 (732.0 b) TX bytes:732 (732.0 b)

Page 216
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Software Watchdog
The system includes an advanced power system that provides watchdog and powerfail protection with powerfail
warning capabilities.

The watchdog provision is independent of the main processor, but does interact with it. The watchdog exists as part of
the power supply subsystem, and requires that it be "pinged" by the main processor every 10 minutes. Failure to do so
will be interpreted by the watchdog as a lockup of the main processor and the main processor will be shutdown and
restarted in an attempt to get the system back into operation. Exceptions:

The watchdog is initially held off for 4 hours after processor power on, allowing for initial startup and worst case
filesystem repair on a large system disk.
If operating in the system's bootloader, the watchdog will be "pinged" every time that a bootloader command is
executed so that the processor is allowed to continue to run during low-level maintenance activities. Each
bootloader command extends the watchdog for 4 hours.

Default Behavior:

The watchdog is normally serviced by a Linux service in order to keep the system alive. By default, only a failure of Linux
to boot or a crash of the operating system or of the watchdog service will cause the watchdog to trigger and restart the
system.

Powerfail Protection:

The system includes an internal power backup called a supercapacitor array. This backup provides enough residual
power to terminate any running applications and shut down Linux properly. Once powerfail has been detected, the
system begins to operate off of the residual power and issues a request to Linux to shutdown. A Linux service watches
for the shutdown request, and once received immediately forces all user processes to terminate and then shuts down
Linux. When Linux has completed the shutdown, the shutdown request will be acknowledged and the processor will
power off.

Page 217
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Application Specific Configuration:

The system provides several ways that the application can improve its control of the system:

The application can monitor power supply information including system voltages, temperature and (optionally)
relative humidity as well as operating states. These values can be acted on, or can simply be stored or recorded
for diagnostic purposes.
One of the power supply parameters retrieved is a set of system flags that indicates that the system is being
requested to shut down soon, but when "convenient". This would include for example, a condition where it has
become too warm or too humid to continue operation. In this case, the application must react to the application
shutdown request flag and be terminated in a maximum of 15 minutes.
Some of the system flags can be written to, allowing the application some level of control. For example, through
the flags the application can control:
o A digital output (for example to turn on a dehumidifier or pump if high humidity is detected)
o Indicating a software fault (affects the Status LED)
o The application can more closely control the system watchdog by servicing it itself. In this way, the
watchdog will not depend on whether or not Linux and the Linux watchdog service is running, but can
be made to depend instead on the proper functioning of the application.

Page 218
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Linux Passwords
The default digitizer Linux passwords are as follows:

root kmi

kmi kmi

NOTE: Kinemetrics STRONGLY recommends that you change the system passwords to something well
known to your organization, but which is different from the Kinemetrics factory defaults.

To change a Linux password for the current user, type:

root@Rock103:~# passwd
Enter new UNIX password:
Retype new UNIX password:
passwd: password updated successfully

To change the password of a Linux user account from root, type:

root@Rock103:~# passwd kmi


Enter new UNIX password:
Retype new UNIX password:
passwd: password updated successfully
To change the Rockhound console password, change it within the RockTalk or Web Interface Parameter Editor.

Page 219
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

File Retrieval
File Retrieval can be done in a number of ways:

By clicking the filename from the Recorded Files page of the Web Server
Using the TX command or Block Mode transfer operations of the Altus Emulation modules
Using the SFTP service and a program such as WinSCP, that is described in another section

In addition however there are push methods available through Rockhound modules that can automatically send out
files when they are recorded.

The E-mail File Sender module allows files to be sent via Authenticated SMTP e-mail. Sending files in this way requires
that you have access to an E-mail server that will accept Authenticated SMTP e-mail messages:

Page 220
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

The other option for a file push is to use an FTP Sender module. This module allows the digitizer to connect to an FTP
server that you provide and will push the files into that server when they are recorded:

A representative FTP Server program is provided on the Rock Support Software CD (300654-PL) provided with your
digitizer. Setup of this program is as described in the FTP Server section.

Note that multiple file sender modules may be added to the system to send files to multiple destinations as needed.

Saving and Restoring Parameters


Once youve configured Rockhound for how you intend to operate your system, you should save your configuration. This
saved copy of the parameters will be used to restore the Rockhound parameters in case they become corrupted. This is
done in two ways:

From a Linux login, use the command rhsave to save a copy of your parameters within the system that can be
restored in case your parameters become corrupted.
cd /usr/rock/SMARTSDist/bin
./rhsave

Page 221
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

If the units configuration is destroyed, the system will revert to the copy of the configuration most recently
saved by rhsave, or to the factory default if the configuration was never saved using rhsave.

From the web interface use the Advanced Features function Administrative Details to download a copy of the
parameters to your PC. At the top of the Administrative Details screen, there is a link Click Here to Download
Parameters, from the instrument. You can give this file you are saving a name that is meaningful to you such as
event-recorder-at-10sps-and200sps.jar.
Kinemetrics recommends that you save a copy of your Rockhound parameters any time that you make
significant changes to the parameters so that you can quickly restore them in the event of loss.
To put a configuration that youve saved back on the system, use the web interface via the Advanced Features function
Administrative Details. Select the function Send Parameters, and then select the file to send and after it is sent, press
Validate.

Page 222
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Your parameters can also be saved within the system using the rhsave function from a Linux login. Note that you can
use this any time you wish to store the current configuration as a baseline:

cd /usr/rock/SMARTSDist/bin
./rhsave
To restore parameters saved by the rhsave feature, use the command rhrestore:

cd /usr/rock/SMARTSDist/bin
./rhrestore
To return the system to the Rockhound configuration as it shipped from the factory, use the command
rhfactoryrestore:

cd /usr/rock/SMARTSDist/bin
./rhfactoryrestore
If the units configuration is destroyed, the system will revert to the copy of the configuration most recently saved by
rhsave, or to the factory default if the configuration was never saved using rhsave.

The system will also automatically make copies of the last five (5) configurations so that you can go back to these
configurations at any time. Note that in this case, it is not necessary for you to do anything proactive to save the
configurations in advance, as the copies are save automatically for you.

The saved configuration files are time stamped with the GMT creation time, as config_YYMMDD_HHMMSS.jar.

To restore a saved configuration:

cd /usr/rock/SMARTSDist/save
ls
config_20091027_145129.jar config_20091029_161551.jar
config_20091029_161636.jar config_20091029_161712.jar config_save.list
factory.jar
user.jar

cp config_20091027_145129.jar /usr/rock/SMARTSDist/injar/config.jar
rock restart

Page 223
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Software Updates
Software updates can be installed remotely through the web interface. The software updates will be either Rockhound
updates or updates to the underlying Linux Operating System.

To install a Rockhound update, enable the Administrative Details function through Advanced Features:

Page 224
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Select Send Firmware Update and then select Application:

After pressing OK, select the Rockhound update file. It will typically have a name like rock_update_v2.5.5.jar. After
selecting the file, youll be asked for the SCP login and password. You can choose to save the login information on your
local machine if you like:

After the file transfer is complete, press Validate to install the update. This may take a few minutes until the system is
restarted and operational with your update.

Page 225
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

To install a Linux update, enable the Administrative Details function through Advanced Features:

Select Send Firmware Update and then select OS Patch:

Page 226
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

After pressing OK, select the Linux update file. It will typically have a name like 3-Update-RockFS-2.1.0. After selecting
the file, youll be asked for the SCP login and password. You can choose to save the login information on your local
machine if you like:

After the file transfer is complete, press Apply OS Patch to install the update. This may take a several minutes until the
system is rebooted and operational with your update.

NOTE: If you wish, you may also directly use SFTP rather than the web interface to install updates.

To install a Rockhound update through SFTP:

Connect to the unit using a tool like WinSCP


Place the Rockhound update in the /usr/rock/SMARTSDist/injar directory
Rename the update file to update.jar
Using the Administrative Details page, select Restart FW to install the update

To install a Linux update through SFTP:

Connect to the unit using a tool like WinSCP


Place the Linux update in the directory /opt/kmi/updates/pending
Using the Administrative Details page, select Apply OS Patch to install the update

Page 227
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Log files
To help you maintain your system, the Rockhound software keeps log files of most important system actions, messages,
and exceptions. These are kept in two different log files, the Runtime-log, which keeps track of normal system messages
and reporting, and the Error-log, which keeps track of error messages and conditions. Both logs are trimmed
automatically to keep their size down.

The log files can be useful as a diagnostic aid with the assistance of Kinemetrics where needed.

The Runtime-log can be selected from the left pane as shown:

Page 228
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

The Error log can be selected from the left pane as shown:

Time stamps within the log files are relative to system time (UTC).

Page 229
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

State of Health
The digitizer tracks several State of Health (SOH) parameters that can be used to monitor system environmental values
such as temperature and humidity as well as system voltages and currents, GPS drift, clock phase and clock quality.

These values are enabled in the parameters for the Rock Front End:

Other values are available in the advanced and test mode module parameters.

Page 230
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Scaling of SOH values:

SOH Name Default Scale Description


Temperature true X 10 Record temperature stream as .deg
Humidity true X 10 Record humidity stream as .hum
X
VofV12Batt true Record VofV12Batt stream as .vvb
1000
X
VofSysPwr true Record system voltage stream as .vep
1000
X
IofSysPwr true Record system current stream as .vec
1000
TimeQual true X1 Record time quality stream as .lcq
TCXODrift true X1 Record clock phase stream as .lce (ns)
Record CPU Load Average stream as .cpu (values < ~200 indicate sufficient
LoadAverage true X 100
idle time)
PercentUsed false X 100 Record Percent of Data Storage Used stream as .dsk
X
MassPos1 false Record mass position stream as .um#1
1000
X
MassPos2 false Record mass position stream as .um#2
1000
X
MassPos3 false Record mass position stream as .um#3
1000
TCXODAC false X1 Record TCXO DAC stream as .vco
UserStat false X1 Record user status stream as .usr. See the ROCK Console command "userstat".

And mostly diagnostic...

SOH Name Default Scale Description


ADCSkew false X1 Record ADC skew stream as .sk# (internal timer counts)
SOHVolts1- X Record SOH voltage stream as .v#1-.v#a (# is which DSP board the data comes
false
10 1000 from)

Page 231
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

In addition to the ability to record and display these State of Health values as normal 1sps data streams, the values are
also saved in Short Term (last 24 hours) and Long Term (last year) history. These SOH histories can be displayed by
selecting State-of-Health from the left pane, and then selecting the requested displays:

Page 232
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Once you press OK, the history displays must be updated (this may take a few minutes), but then the displays will show
as follows:

Page 233
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Note that the displays include limits (left margin), description (lower right corner), and a time scale (bottom). The time
scale is hour of day (UTC) for the short term display and months for the long term display.

Page 234
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Software Tools
The Rock digitizers are designed to work with standard software and hardware tools wherever possible. In many cases,
those tools are provided along with most computers or are easily available for download. In some cases tools are
required that may not come standard on every computer. In these cases, Kinemetrics has provided publicly available
tools on the Rock Support Software CD (300654-PL). The tools provided are ones that Kinemetrics has found to work
well, although you are of course free to use other similar tools that you prefer.

The Rock Support Software CD programs are specific to the Windows Operating Systems. If you are running Linux or
Solaris, suitable programs are easily available for those Operating Systems. For example:

For Linux:

For Telnet: Use telnet


For Serial Terminal Emulation: Use minicom
For Secure Terminal connections: Use ssh
For Secure File Transfers: Use sftp

For Solaris:

For Telnet: Use telnet


For Serial Terminal Emulation: Use tip
For Secure Terminal connections: Use ssh
For Secure File Transfers: Use scp

If you do not have other tools such as terminal emulation programs, telnet client, and secure file transfer programs that
you know you want to use, and you are using Windows, we suggest that you install the software from the Rock Support
Software CD (300654-PL) now.

Web Browser
As indicated, the digitizer is intended to operate with little more than a web browser. Most modern web browsers are
sufficient, and need meet only a few requirements to operate well with the digitizer:

Support HTML 1.1 or later


Support frames
Support Java and Java Applets

Page 235
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Java
The web interface of the digitizer will function without installing Java, but many of the most useful and important
feature of the interface require Java. Kinemetrics recommends that your computer have Java installed and that Java
support be enabled in your web browser. Java Virtual Machines are available from several suppliers and are usually free.

One such program is available from java.sun.com. On the Sun website it is called the Java SE JRE.

Terminal Program
In order to communicate with the digitizer through a serial port (such as communicating via the RS-232 Linux console)
you will need a terminal program that can communicate through RS-232. Historically this was done on Windows based
computers using HyperTerminal. However, in Windows Vista HyperTerminal is no longer included.

You can download and purchase HyperTerminal from www.hilgraeve.com, or you can use the free program PuTTY,
which is provided on the Rock Support Software CD. PuTTY is described below.

Telnet Client
To communicate with the digitizer through its command console you will need a telnet client program. Most computers
include telnet as part of the normal distribution, but Windows Vista no longer includes telnet.

As a replacement you can use the free program PuTTY, which is provided on the Rock Support Software CD. PuTTY is
described below.

Page 236
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

WinSCP
WinSCP is a free program that allows you to make secure connections for file uploads and downloads. WinSCP is
included on the Rock Support Software CD.

Since WinSCP is not Kinemetrics software and is provided only as an example, we make no attempt to thoroughly
describe all capabilities. However we will describe basic operation here. When you start WinSCP you will see a dialog
that looks something like this:

Page 237
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

To connect to a digitizer, enter the IP address of the digitizer as Host name as well as the User name and Password as
shown here:

Press Login and you will initially see the following confirmation:

This message indicates that you are about to make a secure connection to the digitizer and is a warning that you have to
be sure youre talking to the correct unit. Normally, once you accept the key you will not have to do this again when
connecting to the same digitizer from the same computer.

Page 238
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Once WinSCP has logged into the digitizer, you will see something that looks like this:

The left pane of the program represents your computer and the right pane represents the digitizer. You can navigate the
panes independently and can then upload or download files by simply dragging the files from one side to the other. You
can also drag files directly to or from other applications such as your desktop or Windows Explorer.

If you have a set of directories that you access often, such as downloading recorded files from the digitizers
/data/events directory to a working folder on your computer, you can set the folders correctly and then select Session
Save Session. Youll be allowed to name the session here:

Page 239
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Later when you restart WinSCP, you can choose the session from the list and click Login. This will save you from having
to manually enter the IP address, username, or passwords each time. In addition, the panes for your computer and the
digitizers directories will be set automatically:

Page 240
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

PuTTY
PuTTY is a secure terminal program that you can use to open a secure Linux console to your digitizer. PuTTY uses the SSH
layer to make a secure connection.

Since PuTTY is not Kinemetrics software and is provided only as an example, we make no attempt to thoroughly describe
all capabilities. However we will describe basic operation here. When you start PuTTY you will see a dialog that looks
something like this:

Page 241
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

To log into the digitizer, enter the IP address of the unit and press Open:

Page 242
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Next, you will see a secure console window as follows:

Page 243
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

As with WinSCP you can save sessions to avoid typing in the future by entering the IP address at Host name, the name
you assigned to the digitizer under Saved Sessions, and then press Save:

Page 244
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

The unit will now appear in the list as mygranite, so reconnecting involves only starting the program, selecting the unit
name (mygranite), and then selecting Open:

Page 245
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Please also note that PuTTY can be used as a telnet client, so you can connect to the Command Console by entering the
IP address under Host name, selecting Telnet, entering the port as 9900 and clicking Open:

As with WinSCP and the PuTTY SSH connection, you can save this session by entering a name under Saved Sessions
and clicking Save.

PuTTY can also be used as a simple terminal program to open a serial console to your digitizer (for example, to connect
to the Linux console).

Page 246
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Again, when you start PuTTY you will see a dialog that looks something like this:

Page 247
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Select Serial and specify the Serial line (e.g.: COM2) and the baud rate:

Page 248
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Click Open and youll see something like:

Note that the Linux serial console is at 38400 baud.

You can save your serial session by selecting Serial, entering the COM port and baud rate, entering the name as a
Saved Session and clicking Save.

Page 249
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

FTP Server
If you wish to transmit files from your digitizer automatically, one way to do this is to send them to an FTP server that
receives the files. There are several public domain and commercial FTP server programs that you can choose from, but
one such program is the WAR-FTPD.

To install WAR-FTP, place the war-ftpd.exe executable in an appropriate directory (Program Files\FTP is suggested) and
start the program:

Select no anonymous logins.

Page 250
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Select from the menu Properties Security Edit Default:

If present, select and DELETE the path for the \ directory. Click OK.

Select from the menu Properties Security Edit User:

Page 251
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Choose Add to add a user. Add an admin user:

Specify and confirm the password. The default is kmi (but you can use what you want):

Select the File Access tab:

Page 252
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Press the Add button on the File Access tab under Path, and specify the directory where files will download to on
your PC, such as C:\data, then press OK:

Set the permissions on the directory as follows or as appropriate, then press Apply, then OK:

Another way to improve security a bit is to limit permissions (for example, eliminating List, Write, and Delete
permissions via FTP), or to run the FTP server from a user with limited access rights that only has access to those
directories needed for the task, such as downloading to the C:\data directory on your PC.

You may choose to add other users with different permissions or access to different directories.

Page 253
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Select Properties Options and select the General tab. Set startup options as follows:

Click OK.

You may start and stop the FTP server manually from its menu with the selection Properties Start Service or Stop
Service.

Page 254
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Configure the FTP Sender module in your digitizers layout to match the IP address of the FTP server, the FTP user name
and password (using the System Operation and Passwords selection from the left pane) as follows:

Page 255
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

RockTalk
As an alternative to the web interface, you can use the RockTalk program that is part of the Rockhound distribution for
PC. Rockhound is a Java program that runs on your PC and allows you to communicate with your digitizer over IP links.
Details of RockTalk are contained in the Rockhound manual, p/n 304702. Basic operation is described here.

In order to use RockTalk to communicate with your digitizer, you must:

Install Java
Install the Rockhound distribution
Have IP access to your digitizer
Have the FTP server enabled on the digitizer

RockTalk supports communication with multiple digitizers, so is must be set up to communicate as shown here. Start the
program and youll see:

Page 256
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Select Setup RockTalk Setup:

The top section is a list of units to communicate with. Since the initial install has no units set up, it adds one called
ROCK1. You can rename this unit by clicking Rename and entering a new name. Well cover adding additional units
later.

Enter the IP address of the unit as shown:

Page 257
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Press Console Password to set the Rockhound Console password used when connecting to the unit. The default (old)
password is kmi, so enter and confirm the password configured in your unit as shown:

Click Advanced User privileges and youll get this warning:

Click OK to close RockTalk setup, then re-enter with Setup RockTalk Setup:

Page 258
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Page 259
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Click Advanced Level:

Select Configuration Archival, and then press OK:

Click OK to close this informational window, click OK to close RockTalk Setup, and then close RockTalk.

Page 260
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Reopen RockTalk and youll see:

Re-enter RockTalk Setup:

Set FTP Login name to admin, and set the FTP Password to kmi or whatever the passwords has been changed to on
the admin account.

Click OK to save.

Page 261
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

At this point, RockTalk is set up to communicate with your digitizer. Here is a brief overview of basic functions:

Note the name ROCK1 in the title bar. This shows the currently selected digitizer (remember we said earlier that
RockTalk can be used to communicate with multiple digitizers).

File Open Layout will read the current layout and configuration from the digitizer.

File Save Layout will send a modified layout and configuration back to the digitizer.

File Archive Layout will save a copy of the current configuration locally.

File De-archive Layout will read a local configuration so it can be edited.

Setup Layout Wizard allows you to create a new layout from scratch.

Setup Terminal Window opens a Rockhound command console.

Setup Waveform Viewer Window opens the RockVision waveform viewer.

Edit Edit Hardware Config allows you to edit hardware parameters of the configuration

Edit Edit Parameters allows you to edit operational parameters

Page 262
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Edit Replace Module allows you to replace modules in the layout

Edit Advanced Features allows you to insert or delete modules to and from the layout

Help About RockTalk, Version number.

Other capabilities include sending and receiving registration files (not normally required for Rock digitizers) and updating
firmware. Note that the firmware update selection allows you to update multiple units with one operation.

Remember we had indicated earlier that RockTalk could support multiple digitizers. To add more digitizers, go back to
Setup RockTalk Setup and click Add:

After assigning the new unit a name, youll see:

Page 263
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Go ahead now and complete the unit setup, supplying the IP address, console password, and FTP password. When you
click OK, youll see:

Note that the title bar now indicates ROCK2, so you always know which digitizer RockTalk is communicating with. To
switch back to ROCK1, go back to Setup RockTalk Setup, pull down on the Unit name to ROCK1 and click OK.

Page 264
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Troubleshooting
Modem not Communicating
The most common causes of modem communication problems are cables and improper setup. Regarding setup, it is
most likely that you have not set up the modem connection to use the TTYMonitor so you will see the following message
in the log files:

ERROR! Modem enabled as primary connection

To correct this problem, see the section describing The TTYMonitor.

Private Networks
If your system will operate on a private network without an outside connection, DNS should be disabled. Current
versions of the netconfig script remove the DNS entries if you do not specify them. However, if you have an older
version of the netconfig script, it may be necessary to do this manually by deleting /etc/resolv.conf.

Interactive File Viewer Doesnt List Any Files


Some Anti-Virus programs may restrict non-browser traffic on HTTP port 80. The program Avast! for one is known to do
this. The Web Server of the digitizer can overcome this if you assign the Web Servers Secondary Port Number to a
different port that the Anti-Virus program doesnt interfere with.

For example, you can assign the Secondary Port Number to 9980.

If necessary, allow the new port through any firewalls or routers.

Web Servers Layout Wizard Doesnt Transmit Files


Some Anti-Virus programs may restrict non-browser traffic on HTTP port 80. The program Avast! for one is known to do
this. The Web Server of the digitizer can overcome this if you assign the Web Servers Secondary Port Number to a
different port that the Anti-Virus program doesnt interfere with.

For example, you can assign the Secondary Port Number to 9980.

If necessary, allow the new port through any firewalls or routers.

Internet Explorer 7 and FTP


Internet Explorer 7 doesnt support FTP connections for file retrieval well at all. It can be made to work, but frankly even
when it works it is unpleasant. Kinemetrics recommends that you use utilities such as WinSCP or equivalent to retrieve
files.

WinSCP, when installed from the Rock Support Software CD will integrate with your browser such that you can access
them through the browser using a digitizers address such as:

sftp://10.0.1.153/

Page 265
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Altus Emulator and SDS


Altus Emulation SDS will only steam the highest sample rate, so if you mix SDS data and SOH channels (which are at
1sps), you will not see the SOH channels on SDS. You must either be aware of this and deal with the fact that you'll be
missing some channels or specify that only the actual data channels are to be sent.

Waveform Viewer Stops Updating


Displaying many channels or a few channels at high data rates may fail because Java Applets don't have enough memory
by default. To fix this, increase the amount of memory available to applets. On windows you open Control Panel --> Java.
Open the Java tab and Applet Runtime Settings. Set the runtime parameters to something like -Xmx128m. Apply the
changes, close the Java control panel, and close and reopen the browser to apply changes.

FileViewer and Large Files


Large files may fail because Java Applets don't have enough memory by default. To fix this, increase the amount of
memory available to applets. On windows you open Control Panel --> Java. Open the Java tab and Applet Runtime
Settings. Set the runtime parameters to something like -Xmx128m. Apply the changes, close the Java control panel, and
close and reopen the browser to apply changes.

Deleting a Linux directory with lots of files


If a configuration error inadvertently results in the creation of lots of useless files such as when you have inadvertently
set the trigger levels too low, you may find that Linux has problems dealing with the large directories. In this case you
may find that trying even to delete the files fails with the message too many files. One way to correct the problem is
with a simple script:

cd /tmp/kmi
for I in `ls`; do echo $I; rm $I; done

Cant delete data files when logged in as admin


If you are unable to data delete files when logged in as the admin user, it is probably because permissions are not set
correctly for the data directory and any subdirectories. This applies to login via SSH (PuTTY) or SCP (WinSCP).

One temporary solution is to log in as root. While this will work and is generally safe over a secure connection, it is best
to avoid logging in as root whenever there is an alternative that will do the job.

As of the Rocks Linux patch Update 9, permissions on all standard data directories and subdirectories will automatically
be set. If you dont yet have Update 9 installed, this is your first step.

If you are storing your data in an alternate location, such as a secondary memory card or an external storage device,
then you will have to set the permissions properly for the parent data directory as well as for any subdirectories that
already exist. Once the changes are made, further subdirectories created by the system will be correct.

Page 266
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

In this example we will use the name "MyData" as the desired data directory name.

login as root.
cd to where you want the new directory created.
mkdir MyData
chmod 775 MyData
chmod g+s MyData
chgrp -R admin MyData

NOTE: If you are trying to fix an existing directory skip the process of making the directory (mkdir
MyData). Additionally you will need to do a "chmod g+s" on any pre-existing sub-directories under
MyData.

Once done, you should be able to access and manage your files when logged in as the admin user, and be able to
access (read only) your files when logged in as the client user.

IP issues. Firewalls and router blocks


If youre having problems with IP communication, here are some basic troubleshooting tips:

If the digitizer and computer are connected through the internet, make sure that both units can communicate through
the internet. The easiest way is to ping a third party server such as Google. Most common mistakes are specifying the
wrong gateway or wrong DNS servers.

If the digitizer and computer are on the same private network, make sure that both the computer and the digitizer are
on the same network (first three parts of the IP address the same). Make sure the two units can ping each other.

Check each service manually that you plan to use, whether FTP (port 21), TELNET (port 23), SSH (port 22), SMTP e-mail
(port 25), NTP (port 123) or Rockhound specific services such as the Rockhound Console (port 9900).

If you have problems accessing any particular service, check to make sure that the ports are open on any Operating
System provided or third party software firewall. If youre going through a router, you will also need to check that the
ports are open through the router. Finally, some antivirus software includes port blocking features you may have to
check.

Page 267
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

External Charger
The digitizers power supply can intelligently control an external charger used to maintain large batteries. To check if the
external charger is enabled, type psdisplay from the Linux prompt:

[root@GRANITE:~]# psdisplay

PSRTC=256263765
Temp=28.00
Humidity=28.68
Flags=2084
ExtCharger=0
SensorPwr=1
VofSC=2.279
Vof1_8VCore=1.801
VofVCC=3.326
VofVBoost=5.433
Vof12VPOE=0.270
Vof12ExtDC=15.356
VofBatt=13.607
VofV12Batt=13.570
VofSysPwr=15.323
IofSysPwr=0.135
VofVXSCore=1.294
PSVersion=1.42
In this case, the External Charger is disabled (ExtCharger=0). To enable it, type pssetparams as shown:

[root@GRANITE:~]# pssetparams ExtCharger=1


Parameter(s) set.
Save the changes? (Y/N) > y

Page 268
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Storage
The unit supports various storage options including one standard internal Compact Flash card (required), one internal
Secure Digital card (optional), an optional user accessible second Compact Flash card, and an optional user accessible
Secure Digital card (in lieu of the internal Secure Digital card).

Memory cards provided through Kinemetrics will be Industrial Temperature range (-25 degrees C through +85 degrees
C) to be compatible with the overall temperature specifications of the unit.

Kinemetrics DOES NOT recommend the use of commercial grade memory cards (although they are definitely less
expensive) unless the user clearly understands that by using them they are degrading the overall temperature range of
the equipment.

NOTE: Use of commercial grade memory cards may compromise correct operation of the unit, cause
loss of important data, or both.

Primary Compact Flash


Compact Flash card 1 (CF1) is internal to the unit's case and is not physically accessible by the user. The card contains the
operating system and applications software that will be used to operate the unit. Typically, user data is stored on
another memory card (often removable), or can be stored in a separate partition on CF1.

The base price of the unit does not include the cost of the CF1 card, but a CF1 card is required and must be purchased
with the system. The user may opt for various sizes of this memory card at varying amounts of additional cost.

As of this writing, industrial temperature range Compact Flash cards are available up to 32GB in size.

Optional Secure Digital


The optional Secure Digital (SD) card increases the storage available for user data. The SD card capability may be
provided in a couple of different ways:

An internal SD card must be specified at the time that the unit is ordered. The card will be installed inside of the unit and
is not physically user accessible. When used in conjunction with the primary Compact Flash card, the SD card provides
for additional total storage as well as providing a physically separate data partition.

A user accessible SD card option allows the user to remove and/or replace the SD card without shutting the unit down or
opening the central part of the case. There are different packaging options available for access to the SD card - check
with Kinemetrics for details. Please note that if a user accessible SD card is specified, this is used in lieu of the internal SD
card.

As of this writing, industrial temperature range Secure Digital cards are available up to 2GB in size.

Page 269
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Secondary Compact Flash


The optional Secondary Compact Flash (CF2) card increases the storage available for user data. The CF2 card capability is
provided through the Storage Module option that significantly expands the storage capabilities and options of the
system.

When used in conjunction with the primary Compact Flash card, CF2 provides for additional total storage as well as
providing a physically separate data partition.

The Storage Module Option must be specified at the time the unit is ordered. This option allows the user to remove
and/or replace the card without shutting the unit down or opening the central part of the case.

Storage Module
The Storage Module option provides the following functions:

A secondary user accessible Compact Flash card


A user accessible Secure Digital card
Future capabilities, which will include:
o A hard drive option
o A USB 2.0 data "vacuum" port to allow rapid retrieval of data from the hard drive

Check with Kinemetrics for the availability of storage module capabilities.

Page 270
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Digitizer Maintenance
Run Remote Check Tests
Rock digitizers have been designed to allow the system status to be determined remotely via any available
communication links. This prevents the need for most preventative maintenance visits.

The following remote checks can ensure that the unit is functional and the peripheral systems are operational.

Verify the power input to the unit is at the correct voltage


Verify the units current draw is within normal ranges
Verify that the temperature is within normal operating ranges.
Verify that the humidity inside the unit is within limits and not increasing significantly.
Verify that the battery voltage (if present) is correct
Perform a battery load test to check the battery has maintained its charge capacity.
Review the reported internal voltages to ensure that they are all normal.
Verify sensor offsets are within range
Perform sensor functional tests
Review software and communication logs for signs of communication problems or security breaches.
Check for firmware upgrades available on the Kinemetrics web site.
Perform maintenance on disk files to remove older unused files.

These checks will indicate if a field visit is required to investigate an abnormal value or to change batteries, and or
desiccant.

See Power System Display

Advanced Self Test Capabilities


Rock Digitizers are designed to allow automated calibration and they have the capability of selecting different sources
for the input channels to the ADC. In normal use the inputs are connected to the external connectors and the unit
functions as a digitizer. For calibration and testing the inputs can be connected to a calibration bus. The calibration bus
allows the inputs to be grounded, connected to the positive reference, connected to the negative reference or
connected to the calibration DAC. This feature allows the digitizer performance to be tested both on the bench and for
initial calibration but also as part of a system test/diagnostic procedure in the field. For example by grounding the
inputs the digitizer noise can be evaluated, by applying the reference voltage the span calibration can be checked, and
using the calibration DAC the frequency response can be verified. These functions provide a powerful set of diagnostic
tools in addition to the external calibration signal for users with large numbers of units deployed these capabilities
combined with batch files can provide a powerful maintenance tool contact Kinemetrics if you are interested in our
services group helping you develop these capabilities.

Page 271
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Troubleshooting & Service


If your unit needs repair or service, we strongly recommend that you return it to Kinemetrics. If you wish to diagnose
hardware problems yourself, we provide some cautions below.

The procedure for loading new firmware/software into the unit is also detailed below.

Hardware Problems
Caution: Only a qualified electronic technician should diagnose and repair the unit. Be sure the technician carefully
follows both the ESD precautions and the precautions described in the Safety section.
Do not attempt to repair the unit at the board level unless you have equipment for re-working high density lead free
surface mount printed circuit boards and have gone through the appropriate Kinemetrics training course.

We strongly recommend that you stop your diagnosis at the board level and send the entire unit back to Kinemetrics for
repair.

Installing New Firmware

There are several different software components in your system and each has its own versions. The process of updating
each software component will be described within the section that describes the package itself. For example, the
process of updating the Power Supply Application will be discussed within the section that discusses the Power Supply.
See Software Versions.

Preventive Maintenance
Desiccant Replacement

To help maintain low humidity inside the unit, Kinemetrics places a packet of desiccant inside to absorb any water vapor.
The interior humidity is measured by a sensor and reported in the systems diagnostics. We that recommend that you
replace the desiccant package when the internal humidity reading rises above 50% or every 24-36 months. (If the
humidity is still low at 36 months and you have not opened the digitizer this period can be extended.)

You can order new desiccant packets (P/N 700049) from Kinemetrics.

To replace the desiccant package proceed as follows:

Remove all power sources from the system and wait until it has completed its shutdown sequence.
Remove the right protective bumper by gently easing it off the metal end cover.
Remove the seal screw from the front of the unit to allow the pressure within the unit to equalize.
Remove the right end cap by unscrewing the four visible hex head bolts.
The desiccant package will be visible secured to the card cage at the end of the unit by a reusable tie strap.
Loosen the tie strap and replace the desiccant. The old package can safely be disposed of in normal trash.
Replace the end cap ensuring that the O-Ring is correctly located in the interior groove.
Tighten the four screws.
Replace the seal screw in the front of the unit.
Replace the protective bumper.

Page 272
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Reconnect the unit to the power sources.

Caution: Possible equipment damage. If you do not correctly replace the end cap and the seal screw the watertight
integrity of the unit can be compromised and damage can occur to the unit.

Caution: Potential ESD equipment damage. The digitizer circuit boards contain CMOS components that can be
damaged by electrostatic discharge (ESD) if not properly handled. Use a grounded wrist strap, with impedance of
approximately 1 MOhm, to protect components from ESD damage when handling circuit boards. Before removing any
circuit boards or disconnecting any internal cables, be sure that all batteries and the charger are disconnected.
Replacing Batteries

Because they lose their capacity over time, you should replace the optional external batteries with the unit at regular
intervals. Kinemetrics recommends that you replace the batteries every three years in normal operating environments;
more frequently if the units ambient temperature is significantly above 20C. Read the Safety section before replacing
the battery.

Battery Specifications
We strongly recommend that you purchase replacement batteries from Kinemetrics. The batteries used are 12V, 7.2, 12
and 38 amp-hour Sealed Lead Acid cell with either Faston terminal tabs, 0.250" x 0.032" or bolt lugs, equipped with a
pressure relief valve that meets UL924. The battery capacity will have been chosen to provide the required length of
autonomy given the average current draw of the system.

WARNING! Fire or explosion hazard. Do not install a non-rechargeable battery to be charged by the unit. Only
install a sealed lead acid battery with specifications compatible with those above. Other types of Lead Acid battery
should not be used as the temperature corrected charging voltage is set for SLA batteries only. On no account install an
alternative battery chemistry such as Lithium Ion or Nickel Metal Hydride!

If you store a battery, you should still charge it every six to nine months to prevent permanent loss of capacity. You can
float-charge the battery at 13.5-13.8V or cycle-charge the battery, provided the current is limited to less than 2.4 amps
and the voltage to less than 14.7V.

When the voltage reaches 14.7V, the battery will be damaged unless you convert the cycle charging to float charging.
Kinemetrics ships batteries fully charged; make sure a battery is still fully charged before installing it.

Page 273
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Battery Installation
Follow the instructions below to install a new external battery.

WARNING! Burn or explosion hazard. Never place metallic objects (such as a screwdriver or your wristwatch
strap) across the terminals of a battery. The metal terminals can get very hot. Handle batteries with care, and do not
drop them or attempt to take them apart. Recycle used batteries, or dispose of them in accordance with local
regulations. Do not throw used batteries onto a fire.

Caution: Before installing the new battery make sure it is fully charged. If the battery is uncharged, the unit will charge it,
but this can take some time and if AC power is lost, the units power autonomy will be reduced.
To replace an external battery:

Disconnect the power source from the unit and the battery
With the power cable disconnected from both the unit and the PSA remove the old battery.
Connect the negative terminal of the new battery to the black wire.
Connect the positive terminal of the new battery to the red wire.
Connect the power cable to the power connector on the unit and ensure the unit turns on under battery power.
Reconnect the PSA and check that the unit switches to this power source.

NOTE: An external battery should not be used with a system powered by a Power Over Ethernet (POE)
connection.

Battery Recycling
We recommend you recycle the sealed lead-acid cells used by the digitizer; if properly recycled they are
environmentally friendly. You should be able to recycle used batteries at the same centers that recycle
automobile batteries.

Replacing Compact Flash Cards and SD Cards

Kinemetrics uses SanDisk Extreme Cards or equivalent in both the Compact Flash and SD Card locations. These cards are
rated for extremes of temperature, shock, and vibration. Using consumer specification cards could result in data loss and
system failure. Before using any new media, make sure it is properly formatted.

Most likely you will want to format removable media such as Compact Flash and Secure Digital cards so that they can be
read in your PC or PDA. If using new cards they will already be formatted using a PC compatible format, or you can
format them using your PC or PDA.

The cards can also be used with Linux EXT2 or EXT3 formats if you will read the cards in a Linux system, or if you dont
intend to remove them from the system. The system will read the cards correctly regardless of the format you choose.
See Removable Media.

In a digitizer without the optional Storage Module the cards are not designed to be removed. If you do need to renew
them or replace them you should proceed as follows:

Page 274
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Prepare the replacement cards as discussed below. The Compact Flash card holds the entire operating image
software so ensure you have created the correct image.
Remove all power sources from the system and wait until it has completed its shutdown sequence.
Remove the left protective bumper by gently easing it off the metal end cover.
Remove the seal screw from the front of the unit to allow the pressure within the unit to equalize.
Remove the left end cap by unscrewing the four visible hex head bolts.
The sockets for the Compact Flash and SD cards will now be visible.
Replace the card. NOTE: SD cards are removed by pushing inward first.
If the unit has been in the field sometime or the humidity is high we recommend replacing the desiccant pack at
this time.
Replace the end cap ensuring that the O-Ring is correctly located in the interior groove.
Tighten the four screws.
Replace the seal screw in the front of the unit.
Replace the protective bumper.
Reconnect the unit to the power sources.

Caution: Possible data loss. If you do not correctly format your storage media data loss or system crashes can occur.
Caution: Possible equipment damage. If you do not correctly replace the end cap and the seal screw the watertight
integrity of the unit can be compromised and damage can occur to the unit.

Caution: Potential ESD equipment damage. The digitizer circuit boards contain CMOS components that can be
damaged by electrostatic discharge (ESD) if not properly handled. Use a grounded wrist strap, with impedance of
approximately 1 MOhm, to protect components from ESD damage when handling circuit boards. Before removing any
circuit boards or disconnecting any internal cables, be sure that all batteries and the charger are disconnected.

Cleaning the Digitizer

Disconnect all power from the unit before cleaning it including the external battery. Then wipe off the exterior surfaces
with a mild detergent and a damp soft cloth. Do not use an abrasive cloth especially on the label area as this will damage
the unit. The external battery can also be cleaned with a mild detergent and damp cloth following the precautions
outlined in the battery maintenance section.

Caution: Possible water damage. Do not loosen the seal screw or end caps before cleaning the unit. Do not use water to
clean the inside of the digitizer. Doing so will severely damage the unit!
The digitizer should not normally be opened so the interior of the units should be clean. If dust or debris does get inside
the unit, we recommend you use a small "computer vacuum cleaner" to remove this debris. Make sure you have turned
the power off before vacuuming the unit.

Decommissioning & Recycling

Kinemetrics is committed to ensure the preservation of the environment for current and future generations.
Thus, although not required by legislation, we designed the Rock digitizers to comply with the requirements of the RoHS

Page 275
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

(Reduction of Hazardous Material) directive to reduce possible contamination of landfills. The digitizer should be
recycled and not thrown in the normal waste stream destined for the local land fill.

We have made the product easy to disassemble and recycle the constituent parts. The recycling passport describes the
various materials in the digitizer and any hazards than can be encountered in disassembling the unit.

Kinemetrics Recycling Passport

Product Name Granite or Basalt

Product Model Numbers 111900, 111860,112000

Date 4/27/2010

Version 1.1

Contact Information www.kinemetrics.com

Product Substance Present Location Comments


Contains

Batteries

External Mercury/NiCad/Lithium/Other Option External Sealed Lead Acid Battery Optional.

Internal Mercury/NiCad/Lithium/Other No N/A

Parts Containing RoHS Hazardous Substances

Lead External External Covered by the Battery


Battery Directive. Should be recycled in the
normal Lead Acid Battery Recycling
Stream

Mercury No N/A

Cadmium No N/A

Hexavalent Chromium No N/A

Polybrominated Biphenyls (PBB) No N/A

Polybrominated Diphenyl Ethers No N/A


(PBDE)

Page 276
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Other Potentially Hazardous Substances/Information

Printed Circuit Board Assembly Yes Inside RoHS Compliant


>10cm^2

Capacitors with PCBs or other No N/A


items of concern

Gas Discharge Lamps No N/A

Backlight Lamps LCD/TFTs No N/A

Backlight Lamps containing No N/A


Mercury

Plastics containing brominated No N/A


Flame Retardants

LCD >100 cm^2 No N/A

Asbestos No N/A

Refractory Ceramic Fibers No N/A

Radio-active Substances No N/A

Beryllium Oxide No N/A

Other forms of Beryllium No N/A

Other Hazards

Parts under Pressure No N/A

Liquids No N/A

Gasses No N/A

Hidden Mechanical Springs No N/A

High Storage Density Capacitors Yes Internal - Can discharge significant current do
Small Circuit not discharge with an electrical short.
Board

Disassembly Procedure for Recycling

Step Description Comments & Hints

Page 277
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

1 Remove all Power For Safety!


Sources

2 Remove and recycle Battery can normally be recycled wherever auto batteries are recycled.
external Sealed Lead
Acid Battery

3 Remove Rubber End Pull Off


Caps

4 Remove Optional Dust Unscrew Acorn Nuts Holding Attachment Cords


Caps

5 Loosen Connector Nuts, Use Channel Locks if deep socket set not available
Remove Nuts and
Washers

6 Remove Seal Screw in Unseals unit to allow end caps to be removed easily
Front Right Bottom of
Label

7 Remove both End Caps Four Screws Each End

8a Remove Deck & Base For units with internal deck remove the base plate by unscrewing the hex head
Plate screws visible on the base of the unit. Remove the accelerometer deck by undoing
the two screws in the base. The deck can then be removed from the unit by undoing
the ribbon cable. The deck can be disassembled into PWBs and the sensor modules.

8 Remove small If unit has been powered in the last month carefully discharge the supercapacitors
supercapacitor assembly using a 1k load resistor. Do not short them directly!

9 Pull backwards and Remove ADC/DSP Boards and Shields one by one till down the rear mounting frame/
remove internal frame
and circuit boards

10 Remove the Rear Screws on Side


Mounting Frame

12 Remove PWBs Undo Spacers remove processor, front panel, and sensor boards as applicable

13 Remove Label from Insert thin blade under edge of label and pull off
Enclosure

While the Recycling Materials show the exact materials that make up the various components of the unit. By following
these instructions a large portion of the unit can be re-used.

Page 278
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Materials for Recycling

Name Material Qty Location Comments

Protective End Black EPDM 2 External Remove First


Caps

Connector Dust Aluminum Alloy Options Hardware is S/S.


Caps

End Caps Powder Coated Aluminum 2 RoHS Compliant Irridite Finish


Alloy 6063-T6

Enclosure and Powder Coated Aluminum 1 RoHS Compliant Irridite Finish, 4 Stainless Steel
Basalt Base Alloy 6063-T6 PEM Studs

Label Lexan Sheet 1 Can be removed by peeling off enclosure

Mounting Frame Aluminum Alloy 1 RoHS Compliant Irridite Finish, 9 Stainless Steel
Front PEM Studs

Mounting Frame Aluminum Alloy 1 RoHS Compliant Irridite Finish, 8 Stainless Steel
Rear PEM Nuts

PWB s PWB with RoHS Compliant 1 All Circuit Boards in the Unit
Components

Super Cap Pack Electronic Components 1 Unplug and discharge with 1k Ohm resistor for
one minute before disassembling

Misc Hardware Screws, Nuts, Washers, N/A Hardware is mainly 304, 316 Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel

Page 279
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

System Description
This system gives an overview of the Standard Rock digitizer system and the various components that are included in the
system. This explains some of the operational features and will give other information that will allow you to understand
the many capabilities of the system. A Rock Digitizer typically includes the following subsystems:

Intelligent power supply


o DC power input
o Internal supercapacitor array
o External battery interface
o Temperature sensor
o Humidity sensor
o Power system control processor
Main processor System
o Processor
Linux Operating System
BootLoader
Java Virtual Machine
RockHound Software
o On-board flash memory
o On-board RAM
o Console port
o Ethernet Communications
o Serial Communication Interfaces
o Primary Compact Flash card
o Internal Secure Digital socket
o GPS Timing Module & Disciplined Oscillator
One or more four channel high resolution analog to digital converters and supporting circuitry
o Individual DSP
C++ DSP Code
First Board Controls System Timing
o Isolated DC/DC Power supply for Analog Section
o Isolation Barrier to Analog Section
o Four Delta Sigma ADC Converters
o Adjustable Gain Input Stages
o Mass position/Auxiliary ADC
o Calibration and Control Processor
One or More External Sensor Input Boards
o Military Style Converters
o EMI/RFI and Transient Protection Circuitry
o Calibration and Sensor Control Signal Outputs

Page 280
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Optional Internal Sensor Deck (Basalt only):


o 2g/1g EpiSensor Deck (4g/2g Optional)
o Powered from Unit Power

Intelligent Power Supply System


The intelligent power supply subsystem is an important part of the reliability and proper functionality of your system.
The power supply subsystem provides the following features:

Supercapacitor backup
Battery charging
Reversed input and overvoltage protection
Sequenced start up
Sequenced shut down
Communication with the user via status LEDs
Magnetic switch
Temperature monitoring
Humidity monitoring
Timed operation windows
Parameteric operation protection
System watchdog
Digital input/output

In general, the power supply subsystem takes input from system power sources and converts them into the supply
voltages necessary to operate the system. In addition to this primary task, the power supply subsystem also monitors
system current usage, voltage levels, temperatures and other parameters to assure that the system is operating
correctly and within operational limits. Under some circumstances, the power supply subsystem may inhibit start up of
the system in order to protect the hardware. This system basically ensures the safety of the remainder of the Rock
digitizer.

Supercapacitor Backup

The power supply subsystem utilizes a supercapacitor array to provide backup power to the processor. This is important
to assure proper shut down of the operating system in the event that external power is lost. The supercapacitor array
will be charged when power is first applied and before the system is allowed to operate. The process of charging the
supercapacitor array can take up to a few minutes depending on the capacity of the array and how much energy is
already stored.

Page 281
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Battery Charging

The power supply subsystem includes a battery charging feature that can float-charge a Sealed Lead-Acid battery. The
battery charging system will attempt to keep a battery at full charge, so that the system can continue to operate from
the battery when external power has been lost.

Special considerations for battery charging include:

External power limits: The battery will only be charged when external power is at or above 14.8VDC, regardless
of source.
Temperature limits: The battery will only be charged between 0 and +40 degrees C. This prevents shortening
battery life due to charging at extreme temperatures.
Temperature compensated charging: The charging voltage is adjusted with unit temperature to ensure optimum
battery life.
Pulse Charging: Below 9VDC, the battery is assumed to be "deeply discharged", and the battery charger will
attempt to charge the battery using a 10% duty cycle pulse charge.
Battery drop-out: If operating off of battery and battery voltage reaches 10.75VDC, the system will shut down,
thus preventing deep discharge of the battery.
Battery operational limits: Operation from battery is recommended only between -15 and +50 degrees C.
Beyond these limits, the system will continue to operate, but will indicate a fault.

Reversed Input and Overvoltage Protection


The system will protect against a reversed battery and will report the battery voltage as negative on the appropriate
state-of-health channel. The reversed battery is also indicated as a flag indication in the state-of-health data. The system
can continue to operate with reversed battery, but cannot operate from the reversed battery as it's only power source
and will not attempt to charge it.

Sequenced Start Up

The system will perform a sequenced power up when power is applied to the system. The sequence is to assure proper
start up of the processor. The system start up sequence is approximately as follows:

Perform initial start up delays to avoid system "motorboating"

Charge the supercapacitor array


Assure that external power sources and other operating parameters are within limits
Start the processor
Load and start the analog to digital sections

NOTE: Supercapacitor and battery charging circuits are independently controlled

Page 282
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Sequenced Shut Down

The system also controls sequenced power down when the system has been commanded off, or when all sources of
external power have been lost. If external power has been lost, the power supply will perform the following steps after
having automatically started running off of the supercapacitor power:

Turn off the supercapacitor charging circuit


Turn off the battery charging circuit
Notify processor that shut down is imminent, killing all processes
Wait for residual boost voltage low, processor to acknowledge shut down, or shut down timeout to expire
Shut off the processor

When commanded to power down (not due to power loss), the power supply will perform the following steps:

The processor will be notified that a "slow" shut down is required through the power supply status flags, and the
processor will have up to 15 minutes to terminate applications.
The power supply will monitor power loss, processor shut down acknowledge, or completion of the 15 minute
timeout and may then transition to the sequenced shut down described above.

Communication with the User Via Status LEDs

The power supply indicates its state of operation to the user through its LEDs:

Power:

OFF - No power
Steady Green - Running off of external power or POE (Power Over Ethernet)
Flashing Green - The system is starting up
Infrequent Green - Running off of battery

Status:

OFF - Working, no time source


Steady Red - Power supply bootloader turn on. Used to load new power supply firmware
Flashing Red - System Fault detected. For example, system outside of humidity or temperature operating limits.
Infrequent Red - System Error detected. For example, incompatible power sources detected, operating on a
battery and outside of the established battery operating temperature range, or running off of a power source
other than battery showing invalid voltages.
Steady Green - Waiting to turn on. In initial start up delays or timed operation window
Flashing Green - The system is starting up
Infrequent Green - Working, a time source is being used (digitizers only)
Orange - Supercapacitor is being charged
Alternating Red and Green - The system is shutting down

Page 283
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Event:

OFF - No events
Steady Green - Real time data stream (digitizers only)
Flashing Green - Unused condition
Infrequent Green - Events stored (digitizers only)

Magnetic Switch

The magnetic switch is located above and to the right of the Serial 1 connector. The small target on the label between
the words "POWER" and "STATUS" gives the exact location of the switch. The switch is used to start up and shut down
the unit without use of a physical power switch.

The unit has no power switch. When power is connected, the unit's default behavior is to power up and begin operation.
When power is removed, the applications and operating system will shut down and the unit will turn off.

Briefly touching a strong magnet to the magnetic switch location allows the user to affect this default behavior as
follows:

When Running - The magnetic switch causes the unit to shut down and go into a 12 hour timed operation
window. If power remains connected, the unit will restart operation in 12 hours.
When not running (in a timed window) - The magnetic switch will terminate the window and will cause the unit
to start operating.

There are other functions of the magnetic switch used in conjunction with diagnostic functions. These diagnostic
functions are described elsewhere.

Temperature Monitoring

The power supply system monitors system temperature through use of a built-in temperature sensor. The temperature
is used as an operating limit for system operation and battery charging, as well as being sent to the processor as state-
of-health data. Temperature limits are defined as:

Operating (from DC): -20 to +60 OC Operation (optional -30 to +70OC)


Operating (from Battery): -15 to +50 OC
Battery charging: 0 to +40 OC

Humidity Monitoring

When equipped with the humidity sensor, the power supply system monitors system humidity within the case through
use of a built-in humidity sensor. The measured relative humidity is used as an operating limit for system operation, as
well as being sent to the processor as state-of-health data. Maximum operating humidity is 80% relative humidity, but
any rise above 50% indicates either that the desiccant is exhausted or needs to be replaced, and/or that the case is
leaking and is in a damp environment. In both cases, service is required.

Page 284
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Timed Operation Windows

The power supply subsystem supports timed operation windows. The processor can set the power supply's real time
clock, then set a time that the system should power back on (a time that the processor should be turned on), and then
the system can be shut down. Assuming that enough power is maintained to keep the real time clock running, the
system will power up once the specified time is reached and operating parameters (temperature, voltages, etc) are such
that the system is allowed to start.

The real time clock has a small dedicated supercapacitor that is capable of maintaining time in the real time clock for
several days.

Parametric Operation Protection

Operating limits are imposed in order to protect the hardware, but to allow operation of the system as much as possible.
Defined limits are:

Operating (from DC): -20 to +60 OC Operation (optional -30 to +70OC)


Operating (from Battery): -15 to +50 OC
Operating humidity limits: 80% relative humidity
Battery charging: External power at or above 14.8VDC
Battery charging: 0 to +40 OC
Pulse charging: Battery below 9VDC
Battery drop-out: Operating off of battery and battery below 10.75VDC
Battery operational limits: -15 to +50 degrees C. Operating off of battery beyond these limits, the system will
continue to operate, but will indicate a fault.
Supercapacitor array charged: Above 2.3VDC Maximum operating current: 3 Amps
External voltage limits: 7.75 to 16.5VDC
POE voltage limits: 11.4 to 12.6VDC
Maximum operating battery voltage: 15.2VDC
VCC voltage limits: 3.13 to 3.47VDC
1.8V core voltage limits: 1.71 to 1.89VDC
Boost voltage limits: 4.86 to 5.94VDC
Processor core voltage limits: 0.9 to 1.4VDC
Battery exists: 6.0VDC
External DC exists: 1.0VDC
POE exists: 1.0VDC

Page 285
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

System Watchdog

The system includes an advanced power system that provides watchdog and power fail protection with power fail
warning capabilities.

The watchdog provision is independent of the main processor, but does interact with it. The watchdog exists as part of
the power supply subsystem, and requires that it be "pinged" by the main processor every 10 minutes. Failure to do so
will be interpreted by the watchdog as a lockup of the main processor and the main processor will be shut down and
restarted in an attempt to get the system back into operation. Exceptions:

The watchdog is initially held off for 4 hours after processor power on, allowing for initial start up and worst case
filesystem repair on a large system disk.
If operating in the system's bootloader, the watchdog will be "pinged" every time that a bootloader command is
executed so that the processor is allowed to continue to run during low-level maintenance activities. Each
bootloader command extends the watchdog for 4 hours.

Default Behavior
The watchdog is normally serviced by a Linux service in order to keep the system alive. By default, only a failure of Linux
to boot or a crash of the operating system or of the watchdog service will cause the watchdog to trigger and restart the
system.

Power Fail Protection

The system includes an internal power backup called a supercapacitor array which is charged with power at system turn
on. This backup provides enough residual power to terminate any running applications and shut down Linux properly.
Once power fail has been detected, the system begins to operate off of this residual power and issues a request to Linux
to shut down. A Linux service watches for the shut down request, and once received immediately forces all user
processes to terminate and then shuts down Linux. When Linux has completed the shut down, the shut down request
will be acknowledged and the processor will power off.

Page 286
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Application Specific Configuration

The system provides several ways that the application can improve its control of the system:

The application can monitor power supply information including system voltages, temperature and relative
humidity as well as operating states. These values can be acted on, or can simply be stored or recorded for
diagnostic purposes.
One of the power supply parameters retrieved is a set of system flags that indicates that the system is being
requested to shut down soon, but when "convenient". This would include for example, a condition where it has
become too warm or too humid to continue operation. In this case, the application must react to the application
shut down request flag and be terminated in a maximum of 15 minutes.
Some of the system flags can be written to, allowing the application some level of control. For example, through
the flags the application can control:
o A digital output (for example to turn on a dehumidifier or pump if high humidity is detected)
o A digital input that can be read and interpreted by the application (for example, indicating that a pump
is running)
o Indicating a software fault (affects the Status LED)

The application can more closely control the system watchdog by servicing it itself. In this way, the watchdog
will not depend on whether or not Linux and the Linux watchdog service is running, but can be made to depend
instead on the proper functioning of the application.
As an example, you can read from the power supply at /proc/kmissp like this:

cat /proc/kmissp

Page 287
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

The flags read or written to/from /proc/kmissp can be interpreted as follows:

0x0001 - GPIO input bit


0x0002 - GPIO output bit
0x0004 - GPS backup power control
0x0008 - Option slot power (digitizers only)
0x0010 - Battery load test on
0x0020 - Time source OK (affects LED indications)
0x0040 - Battery reversed
0x0080 - Software fault (affects LED indications)
0x0100 - System shutdown requested (15 minute max)
0x0200 - Parameter repair startup
(applications should not start)
0x0400 - System error
0x0800 - Battery charger on
0x1000 - Power supply diagnostic mode
0x2000 - Power supply diagnostic mode
0x4000 - Power supply diagnostic mode
0x8000 - Power supply diagnostic mode

Power System Display

The psdisplay command displays power system information once:

root@Rock102:~# psdisplay

PSRTC=3344025
Temp=26.50
Humidity=37.17
Flags=1
VofSC=2.295
Vof1_8VCore=1.807
VofVCC=3.313
VofVBoost=5.441
Vof12VPOE=0.043
Vof12ExtDC=15.372
VofBatt=0.000
VofV12Batt=0.000
VofSysPwr=15.356
IofSysPwr=0.055
VofVXSCore=1.290
PSVersion=1.15

The items displayed by psdisplay are as follows:

PSRTC: Power supply real time clock time in seconds since January 1, 2000
Temp: Current temperature in degrees C
Humidity: Current relative humidity
Flags: Current power supply system flags
VofSC: Voltage of the power supply supercapacitor pack
Vof1_8VCore: Voltage of the 1.8V core voltage
VofVCC: Voltage of the 3.3V core voltage

Page 288
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

VofVBoost: Voltage of the available boost voltage


Vof12VPOE: Voltage of the POE input
Vof12ExtDC: Voltage of the External DC supply
VofBatt: Voltage of the external battery
VofV12Batt: Voltage of the bipolar battery measurement
VofSysPwr: Voltage of the internal system power bus
IofSysPwr: System current usage in mA
VofVXSCore: Voltage of the processor core voltage
PSVersion: Power supply version

Updating the Power Supply

The intelligent power supply includes a microprocessor that holds some highly specialized firmware for controlling it.
This firmware is updated as part of package updates and normally does not have to be updated separately.

If needed, the power supply firmware can be independently updated in the field when needed as follows:

Obtain the updated power supply firmware (named rock_psu_main.rom) and put it onto your system through
methods such as SFTP or an SD card.

Log into Linux as root

psfwupdate /root/psu.rom

This will load the new power supply firmware, Linux will shutdown and the system will restart with the new firmware.

Please note that the power supply update can also be performed through the sysconfig menu.

Page 289
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Processor System
The Processor system provides the intelligence for the system and controls all the user interfaces, storage media, and
system operation. The processor also is responsible for configuring an loading the code into the DSPs on the Analog to
Digital Converter (ADC) boards. It also handles updating the code in the other processors in the Power Supply and ADC
boards.

Processor

The Processor is a 400 MHz PXA255 XScale Processor. This is a highly integrated low power processor that is based on
the ARM architecture. It has 256 MB of SDRAM Memory and 4MB of Flash. The system boots Linux from the internal
Compact Flash Card

Storage

The unit provides a single internal compact flash slot and a SD Card slot.

Communication Interfaces

The Processor supports multiple communication protocols.

Serial Connections
A console port and a full serial port are provided with every unit, more serial devices can easily be added to the
system. Future Bluetooth expansion is planned.

Ethernet Connections
Rock Digitizers provide a 10BaseT Ethernet connection an additional 10BaseT is available as an option.

USB Connections
The unit provides a USB 1.1 Device Port.

GPS System

A GPS module is provided on the processor board that can work with the Analog to Digital Converter Boards to provide
data time aligned to sub-microsecond accuracy. The GPS can also provide the accurate location of the unit.

Hardware Identification

The major Kinemetrics-built electronic components of your system include information that helps to identify them for
maintenance, warranty, and repair purposes. The processor can interrogate this information.

Each circuit board within the system includes the following information:

Part number
Serial number
Electronic serial number

Page 290
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Assembly dash number


Assembly revision
Parts List revision
Build date
Test date

In addition, a unit tag number is assigned to the system as a whole. This unit tag number is stored on the main processor
board.

To list this identification information on your system, execute the owview command from the Linux command prompt.
The display looks something like:

PartNumber=112130
OptionSlot=A
DashNumber=
BoardRev=X1
PartsListRev=X3
SerialNo=2
Bridge=1
ESerialNo=1C424233000000E8
Built=2606
Tested=3306
BoardType=RS232
PartNumber=112125
DashNumber=
BoardRev=X2
PartsListRev=X10
SerialNo=4
Bridge=1
ESerialNo=1C7E663500000006
Built=1506
Tested=3306
BoardType=FrontPanel
PartNumber=112140
DashNumber=
BoardRev=
PartsListRev=X6
SerialNo=17
Bridge=1
ESerialNo=1C7F3B2E000000D3
Built=2106
Tested=3306
BoardType=MainBoard
UnitTagNo=103
Total Devices: 3

Page 291
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Analog to Digital Converter System


Each 4 Channel ADC DSP Board contains separate DSPs, ADCs and Power Supplies it is this architecture that allows the
Rock Digitizers to be scaled from 4 to 36 Channel systems.

Individual DSP

The DSPs are Analog Devices BlackFin processors coupled with discrete logic embedded in CPLDs. The DSPs
communicate with the main processor using a custom high speed hardware connection system. This connection also
allows all sampling within the system to be synchronized to sub-microsecond accuracy.

C++ DSP Code


The DSPs are programmed in C++ and run a custom executive that ensure reliable real time operation. The DSPs
take the 20ksps samples from the ADC and filter and decimate the streams to the required output rates. They
support rates from 2000 sps down.

Isolated DC/DC Power supply for Analog Section

Each Analog to Digital Converter Block features and isolated DC to DC power supply that provides the power for the ADC
chips and analog circuitry associated with the signal conditioning.

Isolation Barrier to Analog Section

All digital signals to and from the isolated analog section pass through MEMS digital isolators to preserve the isolation of
the analog side of the board.

Four Delta Sigma ADC Converters

Each channel is digitized by a Delta Sigma converter producing a 20ksps output. This raw data stream is sent across the
isolation barrier to the DSP for filtering and decimation.

Adjustable Gain Input Stages

The analog input stage is configurable to three input ranges and has automatic calibration features that allow a
calibrated signal to be connected to the analog input and ADC.

Calibration and Control Processor & Mass position/Auxiliary ADC

A processor is provided on the Analog side of the interface with a low speed ADC to monitor external mass position as
well as the State of Health of the Analog system. This processor also control calibration signals to the sensors and
control signals sent to the sensors.

Page 292
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

External Sensor Input Boards


The external sensor boards connect the signal from the outside world to the ADC boards.

Military Style Connectors

The unit is provided with Military style input connectors to allow it to be used in harsh environments and provide IP67
protection.

EMI/RFI and Transient Protection Circuitry

Each line is protected from EMI/RFI and external transients with one or two stage transient protection as appropriate.

Calibration and Sensor Control Signal Outputs

The input boards condition the calibration and sensor control signals and also provide relay isolation of the calibration
system to provide greater system flexibility.

Basalt EpiSensor Internal Deck Theory of Operation


This section describes the operating principles of the EpiSensor internal deck used in the Basalt.

The EpiSensor deck consists of three orthogonally mounted force balance accelerometers (FBAs) Z-axis, N-axis and E-
axis. The figure below shows a simplified block diagram of the major components of each of the EpiSensors.

Page 293
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Working Principle

The oscillator applies an AC signal of opposite polarity to the two moving capacitor plates (also referred to as "the
moving mass"). When the accelerometer is "zeroed" and when no acceleration is applied, these plates are symmetrical
to the fixed central plate and no voltage is generated.

An acceleration causes the coil and capacitive sensor plates, which are a single assembly mounted on mechanical
flexures (springs), to move with respect to the fixed central plate of the capacitive transducer.

This displacement results in a signal on the center plate of the capacitor becoming unbalanced, resulting in an AC signal
of the same frequency as the oscillator being passed to the amplifier.

The amplifier amplifies this AC signal.

This error signal is then passed to the demodulator where it is synchronously demodulated and filtered, creating a "DC"
error term in the feedback amplifier.

The feedback loop compensates for this error signal by passing current through the coil to create a magnetic restoring
force to "balance" the capacitor plates back to their original null position.

The current traveling through the coil is thus directly proportional to the applied acceleration. By passing this current
through a complex impedance consisting of a resistor and capacitor, it can be converted to a voltage output
proportional to acceleration with a bandwidth of approximately 200 Hz. The internal deck is set to provide a 2g output
range.

Pole Zero Representation


of the EpiSensor

EpiSensor accelerometers are closed-loop, force-feedback sensors measuring the relative displacement of a moving
mass (plates) with respect to the sensor case. The sensors transfer function (TF) depends almost entirely on the
electronic components rather than on the mechanical components of the sensors. The influence on the transfer function
of the mechanical damping, spring elements and internal RC low-pass filter in the trans-conductance amplifier stage
within the closed-loop path of the sensor are negligible for most applications.

We have determined a good empirical model of the system, which uses two pairs of conjugate poles to represent the
transfer function of the instrument. If this transfer function is corrected for the DC sensitivity of the sensor, the
amplitude agreement is within .0.5 dB over the bandwidth of the sensor. The phase agreement is within 2.5 in the 0-
100 Hz band and within 5 over the full bandwidth of the instrument. The phase response of the transfer function is
fairly linear and equivalent to approximately 1.6 ms group delay for signals up to 200 Hz.

Page 294
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

This model can be represented as:

V ( s) k1 * k 2
=
A( s) (s p1 )( s p2 )( s p3 )( s p4 )

where k1 = 2.46 x 1013


k2 = Sensitivity of sensor in V/g (1.25V/g)
s is the Laplace transform variable
p1 = -981 + 1009i (Pole 1)
p2 = -981 - 1009i (Pole 2)
p3 = -3290 + 1263i (Pole 3)
p4 = -3290 - 1263i (Pole 4)
V (s) is the Laplace transform of the output voltage
A (s) is the Laplace transform of the input acceleration

The figure below shows the amplitude, phase and step response of this pole zero representation.

Additional references to pole zero responses and damping are available on the Kinemetrics website.

Polarity Conventions

The internal EpiSensor deck uses a right-handed Z-N-E coordinate system with a positive output for acceleration along
each axis.

Page 295
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Operating Firmware Description


The system operates using the Linux operating system, while the processor digitizer software is written in Java and runs
on a JVM on the system. The power supply and calibration processors are programmed in C, while the DSPs run
software in C++ on a custom scheduling system.

Linux Overview

The Linux kernel used in the system is one of these two:

- MontaVista Linux v2.4.20, which is a commercial version of Linux that includes many
improvements back-ported from the Linux 2.6 development.
- Linux v2.6.35, which is built from kernel.org resources with additions to support Kinemetrics
hardware.

Later systems are shipped with v2.6 and a transitional update patch is available to update systems from the earlier v2.4
to v2.6.

The Linux distribution is sized to operate within the processor and storage resources available, but to accommodate the
needs of the task at hand.

Since the Linux distribution is for a specialized low power embedded system, it is important to note that it may not
include some utilities that experienced Linux users might expect to find on a typical Linux desktop or server. Some of the
Linux capabilities supplied by this distribution include vi, bash, fsck, ssh, telnet, ftp, and awk. This is of course only a
partial list, and some of these features may require the user to enable or configure them before use.

Additional Linux capabilities may be provided by major application software packages such as Antelope on the Marmot
(which includes perl), or by some of the optional software tools available from Kinemetrics.

The Linux kernel and initial boot filesystem are located in flash memory on the processor board itself. Once the Linux
kernel initially loads, control is transferred to the boot and data filesystems located on the primary compact flash card.

The primary compact flash card uses the EXT3 journaling filesystem to give the system improved reliability by making it
less susceptible to corruption caused by improper shut downs or power outages.

Secondary storage devices such as a secondary compact flash card, a secure digital flash card, and a hard drive may be
available on your system depending on its configuration.

It is assumed that the user has some familiarity with Linux. No attempt is made here to familiarize the user with the
internals of Linux or with all available Linux commands, although some very introductory Linux command information is
included here for reference. For more detailed information, the user is referred to any one of the many books, users
groups, or other resources available on this topic.

Source for the parts of Linux that are licensed under the GPL is available on request under section 3(b) of the GPL.

Page 296
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Common Linux Commands


The following is a list of commonly used Linux commands which may be of value as reference information.
Remember that Linux is case sensitive. Options or flags which can be used with a command are placed in [ ]. The [ ]
are not part of the command and should not be included in the command that you type.

This information is not an exhaustive listing of commands!

cd

Change directory

cd .. moves you backwards to the next higher subdirectory level

cd / moves you to the highest directory level

chmod permissions filenames

Changes the permissions for a file

Permissions should include a letter designating who gets permissions (u for the user, g for the group, o for others, or a
for all)

followed by a + or - (to give or take away the permission)

followed by the kind of permission (r for read access, w for write access, x for execute if the file is a program or script)

The complete command that you type should look like:

chmod g-w filename

chown user:group filenames

Changes ownership of a file

clear

Clears the screen

cp oldfiles newfiles

Copies a file; this leaves the old file intact and makes a new copy with a new filename

date

Tells you the current date and time

Page 297
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

df

Displays how much space on the disks (storage partitions) is free

du [-a] [-s] directories

Tells you how much disk space your files occupy The -a option displays the space used by each file, not just each
directory The -s option displays the total space used for each directory but not subdirectory

help

Provides online help; several topics have been included in the help system

login username

Allows you to login for a terminal session, either through telnet, the console, or SSH

logout

Logs you out of a terminal session

ls [-l] [-a] [-p] [-r] [-t] [-x]

Lists the files in a directory

l displays detailed information about each file and directory, including permissions, owners, size and time/date when the
file was last modified

a option displays all the files and subdirectories including hidden files (with names that begin with a dot)

p displays a slash at the end of each directory name to distinguish them from filenames

r displays files in reverse order

t displays files in order of modification time

x displays the filenames in columns across the screen.

mkdir new_directory

Makes a new subdirectory with the name specified by new_directory

mv [-i] oldname newname

Renames a file or moves it from one filename or directory to another. The -i option tells mv to prompt you before it
replaces an existing filename.

passwd

Changes your password

Page 298
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

ping IP address or alias

Sends a ping packet to another system; this provides information concerning the time it takes for information to make
the round trip to the other computer; it will also tell you whether the other system is on-line at that time

ps

Displays information about your processes/jobs/programs which are running on the system

rm [-i] [-r] filenames

Removes or deletes files.

-i option asks you to confirm that you want to delete each file

-r option is dangerous because it allow you to delete an entire directory and all of the files it contains

rmdir directory

Removes a directory; you can use the -i and -r options which are described in the rm command

tail [-r] [-lines] filename

Displays the last few lines of a file

-r displays the lines in reverse order

-lines specifies the number of lines, starting at the end of the file, you want to see

touch [-a] [-c] [-m] [date] filenames

Changes the date and time for a file without changing the content of the file

a changes only the date and time the file was last accessed

c doesn't create a file if it does not already exist

m changes only the date and time the file was last modified

date specifies the date and time to give the file in the mmddhhnn format (month, day, hour, minute)

touch with a new filename with create a new, empty file.

traceroute IP address or alias

Provides information concerning the route which packets must take to get from your computer to a remote
computer/server; typically used to diagnose possible problems in packet routing

vi

Page 299
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

VI is a text editor. Further information concerning the editing commands for VI can be found in a following section.

Provides information concerning who is logged into the system and some details on how they are connected

who

Tells you who is using the system at that time

The VI Editor
VI is a standard text editor found on Linux systems. With VI you can create new files or edit existing files. To start VI
you should type 'vi filename' where filename is the name of a new or existing file which you wish to edit. Use the
arrow keys to scroll through the document. The following is a list of the commands which are used in VI to edit
documents. For a more complete description of the use of the VI editor, check out the section concerning VI in the
Linux Users' Guide written by Larry Greenfield.

This is a partial list of common VI commands. To enter one of these commands, press the ESC key then the
command key which is listed below:

a appends text after the cursor

A appends text at end of the line

b back up to beginning of word in current line

d delete line

e move to end of word

G go to end of file

h move the cursor to the left

H move the cursor to the top of the screen

i insert text before the cursor

I insert text at beginning of line

j move the cursor down

k move the cursor up

l move the cursor to the right

o open a line below the current line

O open a line above the current line

Page 300
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

r replace character at cursor with the next character typed

u undo the last change made

U restore current line, discarding changes

w move to beginning of next word

x delete character at cursor

X delete character before cursor

y Yank (or copy) operator

Y make copy of current line

$ go to end of line

:q! quit VI without saving changes

:wq write changes to file then quit VI

Updating Linux
The Linux distribution provides for field updates of the kernel, init filesystem, boot flash, and files on the primary
compact flash card.

Updates can be installed by placing update files into the directory

/opt/kmi/updates/pending

When the system is rebooted it will attempt to install updates found there in numeric sorted order. Updates will
follow a naming convention like:

17-Update-RockFS-2.1.0 (Linux 2.4)

Rock1-2.6-Update-4 (Linux 2.6)

The results of updates are kept in the file:

/opt/kmi/updates/update.log

If an update succeeds it will be moved to the directory:

/opt/kmi/updates/applied

You may then delete the applied patches if you wish.

Page 301
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

If an update fails, the update system will be suspended until the following file is removed:

/opt/kmi/updates/update.failure

The log may be consulted for further details about the failure.

Basically, you need to fix the problem, and then delete the update.failure file. The system will resume
updates at the next reboot.

Software Versions
There are several different software components in your system and each has its own versions. The versions of each will
be listed on the data sheet that came with your unit. Software versions include:

The Power Supply Bootloader


The Power Supply Application
The Main Processor's Bootloader
The Boot Script
The Linux Kernel
The Initial File System
The Compact Flash Image
The Java virtual machine (JVM) version
Rockhound

Page 302
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

The versions command, available at the Linux prompt will list the most important software versions (of those
available to Linux) as in the example below. In order, they are:

The initial file system version


The JVM version
The Linux kernel version
The power supply application version
The Rockhound startup script version
The compact flash image version
Linux update (patch) level
The Rockhound version

[root@Marmot:~]# versions (note this is for Linux v2.4)

KMI Rock initrd 2.1.2


KMI Rock IBM J9 JVM 2.1-kmi.1
KMI Rock Kernel, build: Feb 7 2008, 08:27:49
KMI Rock PSU PSVersion=5.00
KMI Rock Software Base 1.0
KMI Rock filesystem 2.1.0
KMI Rock filesystem 2.1.0 Update 3 (beta-25)
KMI Rockhound 2.5.5

[root@Basalt:~]# versions (note this is for Linux v2.6)

Oracle Java(TM) 1.7.0 EJRE (build 1.7.0-b147, headless)


KMI Rock bdcollectd v1.0
KMI Rock Kernel, build: Aug 6 2012, 21:19:13
KMI Rock PSU PSVersion=5.08
KMI Rock XSCPLD firmware rev E
KMI Rock1 Arm EABI filesystem 1.0
KMI Rockhound 3.9

The process of updating each software component will be described within the section that describes the package itself.
For example, the process of updating the Power Supply Application will be discussed within the section that discusses
the Power Supply.

Page 303
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Software Development Tools

Software Development Tools Available for the Rock digitizers includes:

A C-Compiler
A Perl interpreter (under Linux 2.6)
A Python interpreter (under Linux 2.6)
A JVM (1.3 under Linux 2.4, 1.7 under Linux 2.6)
A Rockhound Software Development Kit

NOTE: The C compiler is covered under GPL, and as such is available through Kinemetrics for a
distribution fee as is and without support. If you require support of any kind - including installation,
setup and configuration or programming assistance, you must purchase a support contract. The
compilers are available through Kinemetrics in executable form only, and are not guaranteed to be
bug free.

These software tools, if not included in your product, are available through Kinemetrics or Kinemetrics' partners at
additional cost. Please contact Kinemetrics for further information.

Page 304
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Hardware Reference
The hardware reference section contains information that may help you with more advanced system installations and if
you wish to make your own cable systems or power supplies.

System Power Requirements


The exact current drawn by the digitizer depends on the exact options contained in your system, any power the system
is providing to other equipment, and how heavy a computational load is placed on the system. Thus, it is difficult to give
definitive power systems and the user is advised to measure a system in operation to determine a more accurate figure.

The Power Consumption of a Rock Digitizer can be approximated as follows:

The Processor System with Ethernet and GPS enabled draws approximately 1W of power. Each four channel Analog to
Digital Converter adds approximately another 1W. Uniaxial dual supply sensors draw approximately 0.25W.

This gives a power consumption of approximately:

3W for a 4 Channel System with external sensors (0.25A @ 12V)


5W for an 8 Channel System with external sensors (0.42A @ 12V)
7W for a 12 Channel System with external sensors (0.58 A @ 12V)
13.2W for a 24 Channel System with external sensors (1.1A @ 12V)
19.2W for a 36 Channel System with external sensors (1.6A @ 12V)
The power consumption of a Basalt unit with an internal deck is typically less than 2W (165mA @12V)

When you know the current consumption of your system, its actual autonomy with any battery can be calculated using
this formula:

T (hours) = Capacity (Ah)/ I (A) = hours of autonomy

For example a 12 Channel System with Sensors equipped with a 12Ah battery would have an autonomy of about 20
hours.

Kinemetrics supplies 12V, 7.2, 12 and 38 amp-hour Sealed Lead Acid cell with either Faston terminal tabs, 0.250" x
0.032" or bolt lugs, equipped with a pressure relief valve that meets UL924. Batteries of capacity below 6Ah should not
be used as the system can charge them too quickly. The charging circuitry is not capable of charging batteries over 38 Ah
in a reasonable amount of time and an external charging system should be used with this system.

If you are supplying power to the system the voltage needs to be between 8-16 VDC. If the unit is to charge an external
Sealed Lead Acid battery the voltage should be between 15.5 to 16 VDC. The supply should be capable of providing a
minimum current of 500mA at 12VDC to charge the internal Super Capacitors. This level of current is required for up to
5 minutes when the unit is first turned on. It should also be capable of supplying the charging current for the ~100uF of
input capacitors in the unit without folding back or entering a fault state. If the unit is to charge an external Sealed Lead
Acid battery the supply should be capable of supplying 3.5A at 15.5 VDC (A nominal 50W rated supply will normally be
sufficient.). The power supply should be CE rated and rated for operation over the temperature range expected for the
system.

Page 305
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Connector Reference
This section contains cable and connector reference material that can be used for creating or customizing cables for your
unit. In addition, this information can be useful for electrical diagnosis of cabling or electrical problems.

Power Connector

Connector: 851-07P14-12PX54-A7, 12 Pins, Shell 14, Rotated X, Blk, (8x1,4x1.6)

Mating Connector: 851-06EC14-12SX54, 12 Sockets, Shell 14, Rotated X, Blk (KMI 852173)

Power In from 8-18VDC source needs to be ~15.5V for Battery Charging. This connector uses pins as power is supplied to
the unit, charging current is only output from the unit when power has been supplied through the connector. The power
pins are provided with Reverse Polarity Protection, ESD & EMI Protection, and protection from lightning induced
transients using Gas Arresters.

The battery charging circuit is designed to charge and take power from a 12V SLA battery. (Observe all safety warnings
and cautions!) It features Reverse Polarity Protection, ESD & EMI Protection, and protection from lightning induced
transients using Gas Arresters.

This connector provides one user input and one user output that can be used for several purposes as determined by the
software running on the unit:

The input which is read by the PSOC can function as the equivalent of the Baler "ENETBPWR" signal

The digital inputs and outputs are isolated from the system and have both ESD and EMI protection. They are not protected against
lightning induced transients.

The one wire power LAN is used to monitor and control Kinemetrics optional external power systems and "intelligent"
batteries, and to communicate with an optional Kinemetrics local POE hub that is providing local power to the unit. It
should not be run extended distances and assumes lightning protection is provided on the input end as it is only ESD and
EMI protected.

NOTE: If the optional internal power connector is used the pins that are used will be disconnected
from the Front Panel so they are open - this is to prevent multiple power supplies or batteries being
connected in contention. This will be indicated on the labeling of the unit.

Page 306
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Power Connector Description

Power Connector Pins

Power Connector Wiring Diagram

Page 307
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Serial, USB, Console Connector

Connector: 851-07P14-18PX54-A7, 18 Pins, Shell 14, Rotated X, Blk

Mating Connector: 851-06EC14-18SX54, 18 Sockets, Shell 14, Rotated X, Blk (KMI 852174)

This connector includes a full function RS232 port that can be used as a communication interface to the system. The DSR
line can also be monitored to turn the system on allowing the unit to function with a Q330 controlling power via the
serial port connection.

The USB 1.1 interface is present to allow a laptop to connect to the unit via USB. (Future Software Function)

The three wire RS232 console connection is also present for system set up and repair. This is not meant as a port to be
used for data input or output.

Pins are used as the USB interface supplies 5V to the unit so power is present on the connecting cable. Protection levels
for all pins are ESD/EMI only as long external cables are not supposed to connect to these pins.

Serial/USB/Console Connector Description

Page 308
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Serial/USB/Console Connector Pins

Serial/USB/Console DB-9 Connector Pins

Serial/USB/Console USB Connector Pins

Page 309
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Serial/USB/Console Connector Wiring Diagram

XUP -> USBDATA+

XUM -> USBDATA-

XUVGnd -> USBGND

XUV5P -> USBVCC

Page 310
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Ethernet 1 Connector

Connector: 851-07P12-8PX54-A7, 8 Pins, Shell 12, Rotated X, Blk

Mating Connector: 851-06EC12-8SX54, 8 Sockets, Shell 12, Rotated X, Blk (KMI 852175)

This pin definition supports the POE option on the Mil Type connector for a 10-Base-T connection. The pins correspond
to the 8 wires in the four pair cable. The transmission and receive pairs are on the outside. This connector uses pins as
power is present on the incoming cable. The Ethernet connections are all isolated with a 1500V Transformer followed by
semiconductor transient suppressors. EMI protection is provided by high frequency ferrite beads on the connector.

Wiring colors are per EIA T568B color code.

As there is no shield on a CAT-5(e) cable there is no need for a separate PGP pin. Shielded LAN cables should terminate
on the connector in a 360 degree bond.

Ethernet LAN Connector Description

Ethernet LAN Connector Pins

Page 311
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Ethernet LAN Connector Wiring Diagram

Page 312
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

POTS Modem Option Connector

Connector: 851-07B12-2P54-A7, 2 Pins, Shell 12, Blk

Mating Connector: 851-06EC12-2S54, 2 Socket, Shell 12, Blk

The Kinemetrics P/N 112170 Modem option combines a fully integrated modem and approved Data Access
Arrangement (DAA) to attach a Rock digitizer to a standard analog phone system. The Modem meets the following
standards:

V.42 error correction


V.42bia data compression
MNP2-4 error correction
MNP5 data compression
V.92 download to 56K bps (maximum) and upload to 48K bps (maximum)
V.34 33.6K bps (maximum)
V.32bis 14.4K bps (maximum)
V.32 9.6K bps (maximum)
V.23 1200 bps
V.22bis 2.4K bps (maximum)
Bell 212A 1200 bps
V.21 300 bps
Bell 103 300 bps

Depending upon availability of option slots, up to 3 Modems may be installed and operated simultaneously.

Connector uses Pins as Ring voltages are present on input. Assumes Telcom wires are protected by gas arresters at
building service entrance.

Modem Option Connector Description

Pin Name Description Protection Comments

A Tip Phone Line ESD/EMI Phone Line Connection

B Ring Phone Line ESD/EMI Phone Line Connection

Page 313
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Connection to RJ11 Jack Pair 1 (T1 & R1)


Usually the primary dial tone or talk circuit is wired to the center two pins (pins 3 & 4) and is the white/blue and
blue/white pair (AKA: T1 & R1 - tip 1 and ring 1). A standard single line phone draws dial tone from these center pins.

Page 314
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Internal GPS System

The internal GPS system is built into every Rock Digitizer and provides the very accuracy timing system used to time align
the data typically to sub-microsecond accuracy. The system requires an active antenna that connects to the BNC
connector on the front of the unit. The sections below discuss various cabling choices for the antenna and the use of an
optional lightning protector.

GPS Antenna Connection Cabling


Plenum cable is typically used in buildings and other structures where, in case of fire, the cable will not produce
poisonous gasses that will affect the occupants. Plenum refers to the air conditioning ducting, which is usually the
easiest place to run new cable in an existing structure. This cable has good UV and weather resistance and fair
water resistance but has higher loss and is less flexible than our UV resistant cable. KMI plenum cables are typically
less expensive than our UV-resistant cables.

UV-resistant cable does not require conduit and is very flexible and easy to handle in both indoor and outdoor
applications. It also has low loss and good transmission characteristics. It is typically used in temporary and
permanent field installations, away from buildings or other structures, where ease of installation is important. It
may also be used in non-plenum areas of buildings, as permitted by local building codes. KMI UV-resistant GPS
cables generally perform better electrically than our plenum cables, and so would be a better choice for longer cable
runs or installation sites with a marginal GPS signal reception.

For a given type of GPS antenna cable, a shorter length of cable is preferable to a longer length, due to signal
attenuation by the cable. However, too short of a cable can be a problem with active antennas, as their LNA output
can overdrive the GPS module's input. In general, lengths of 25M to 50M of cable as supplied by KMI are
acceptable. Shorter or longer lengths should be discussed with the factory. Lengths between the standard 25M and
50M cables are available as a special order with correspondingly longer lead times.

Installing Optional GPS Lightning Protection


Neither the MiniMag antenna nor the bullet antenna has built-in lightning protection, due to the high cost of
protective devices that can pass the low-level, high-frequency signals used in GPS systems.

The optional lightning protector device (P/N 109457-PL) can be used with internal and external GPS timing systems.
The lightning protector is a small 3 x 1 x 1 box which contains surge-protection devices to shunt surges
from lightning strikes to the ground while still allowing high-frequency signals and the DC power for the active
antenna to pass. It has two female BNC connectors, and comes with a 3 (approx. 1 meter) male-to-male BNC
extension cable.

Purchase a weatherproofing kit for the lightning protector from Kinemetrics (P/N 790076) if the lightning protector
box will be installed outdoors or in a hostile environment.

Page 315
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Connect the GPS antenna to the lightning protector as follows:

Plug the antenna cable into the protector connector marked Surge.
Take the short BNC male-to-male cable (supplied with the protector), and plug its male connector into the
receptacle on the Rock Digitizer.
Make sure to provide a good ground. If at all possible, mount the Protector to a metal plate approximately 12"
square (approx. 30.5 cm sq.), with a good low-resistance and low-inductance ground connection. To mount it to the
grounding panel, use approximately 20 inch-pounds (2.26 Nm) of torque on the screws.

Caution: The lightning protector will not work without adequate grounding.
The strap connecting the grounding panel to earth ground should be as short and heavy as possible (use a copper
strap or braid at least 1 wide) to minimize the resistance and inductance of the ground system. Since a skin effect is
present, use a straight strap with as large a surface area as possible, and keep the bends in the strap to an 8" or
larger radius.

Optional External GPS System

The optional external GPS system provides the same accurate timing as the internal GPS but with the added benefit of
allowing the GPS engine/antenna to be located much further away from the digitizer. Distances of 1500 feet (~450m)
are possible using standard CAT-5 cable. The external GPS system is used to time align the data typically to sub-
microsecond accuracy.

External GPS Lightning Protection


The External GPS engine/antenna is provided by Trimble. The interface into the Rock Digitizer has gas arrestors on
all signal and power pairs. If additional lightning protection is required, where the signal enters a building, units for
protection of RS485 lines are commercially available.

GPS Antenna Connection Cabling


The cabling between the digitizer and the GPS engine/antenna is done in three parts.

First, a cable from the EXT GPS connector on the digitizer terminates with a weatherized RJ-45 jack.

Second, a cable from the GPS engine/antenna connector terminates with another weatherized RJ-45 jack located on
the same bracket that mechanically connects the engine/antenna with a short length of inch diameter pipe.

Finally, a customer selected length of CAT-5 cable with field installed weatherized RJ-45 plugs connects via two
weatherized RJ-45 jacks. Field installable RJ-45 plug kits together with a crimping tool and spare RJ45-plugs are
included.

It is usually a good idea to secure the EXT GPS to CAT-5 connection against mechanical disturbance.

Once the CAT-5 cable is run, the digitizer and GPS engine/antenna can be connected to each end. This 3 part cable
arrangement allows a contractor to run the CAT-5 cable using either ordinary RJ-45 network connectors or the
weatherized connectors using the crimping tool and instructions provided included in the kit.

Page 316
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Connector: 851-07A12-14SW54-A7, P/N 852873, 14 Sockets, Shell Size 12, Rotation W

Mating Connector: 851-06EC12-14PW54, P/N 852874, 14 Pins, Shell Size 12, Rotation W

External GPS Option Connector Pins

Pin Name Signal Description


C FmAGTPLC+ 1 PPS Transmit + Time Pulse from Acutime Gold to External GPS RS422 +
D FmAGTPLC- 1 PPS Transmit - Time Pulse from Acutime Gold to External GPS RS422 -
Port B: Transmit
E FmAGTxLC+ + Acutime Gold Transmit to External GPS Receive RS422 +
Port B: Transmit
F FmAGTxLC- - Acutime Gold Transmit to External GPS Receive RS422 -
H ToAGRxLC- Port B: Receive - External GPS Transmit to Acutime Gold Receive RS422 +
J ToAGRxLC+ Port B: Receive + External GPS Transmit to Acutime Gold Receive RS422 -
K V24PIso DC Power +24 V power from External GPS To Acutime Gold
L V24GIso DC Ground +24 V ground from External GPS To Acutime Gold

Pins A,B,M,N,P and R are reserved for future use and should not be connected.

External GPS Option Connector Wiring Diagram


J1

B A AuxOutLC
BD1
C A B BD2 AuxGndLC
C BD3 FmAGTPLC+
D BD4 FmAGTPLC-
E BD5 FmAGTxLC+
H F D F BD6 FmAGTxLC-
H BD7 ToAGRxLC-
J BD8 ToAGRxLC+
L E K V24PIso
BD9
L BD10 V24GIso
M J M FmAltTDLC
K BD11
N BD12 ToAltTDLC
P BD13 FmAltTPLC
R N R BD14

P
PGP

Front (sockets) v iew


851-07A12-14SW54-A7

Page 317
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

External Three Channel Sensor Interface

Connector: 851-07B16-26S54-A7, Shell 16, Socket 26, Blk


Mating Connector: 851-06EC16-26P54, Shell 16, Pin 26, Blk (KMI 852176)

Pin Name Protection Description


A CH1 + LIT/ESD/EMI Channel 1 Positive Input
B CH1 - LIT/ESD/EMI Channel 1 Negative Input
C CH1GND LIT/ESD/EMI Channel 1 Ground & Shield (ISO AGND)
D CH2 + LIT/ESD/EMI Channel 2 Positive Input
E CH2 - LIT/ESD/EMI Channel 2 Negative Input
F CH2 GND LIT/ESD/EMI Channel 2 Ground & Shield (ISO AGND)
G CH3 + LIT/ESD/EMI Channel 3 Positive Input
H CH3 - LIT/ESD/EMI Channel 3 Negative Input
J CH3 GND LIT/ESD/EMI Channel 3 Ground & Shield (ISO AGND)
K MPOS1 LIT/ESD/EMI Mass Position Input 1
L MPOS2 LIT/ESD/EMI Mass Position Input 2
M MPOS3 LIT/ESD/EMI Mass Position Input 3
N MPOS RTN LIT/ESD/EMI Mass Position Returns (ISO AGND)
P CALENB LIT/ESD/EMI Calibration Enable (Sensor Control Bit 4)
R SENS 1 LIT/ESD/EMI Sensor Control Bit 1
S SENS 2 LIT/ESD/EMI Sensor Control Bit 2
T SENS 3 LIT/ESD/EMI Sensor Control Bit 3
U CNTRL RTN LIT/ESD/EMI Control Returns (ISO AGND)
V CALSIG LIT/ESD/EMI Calibration Signal
W CAL RTN LIT/ESD/EMI Calibration Signal Return
X +3.3VOWS LIT/ESD/EMI One Wire Sensor Device Power
Y OWSD1 LIT/ESD/EMI One Wire Sensor Data Channel 1
Z OWSRTN LIT/ESD/EMI One Wire Sensor Device Return (ISO AGND)
a PGP N/A Case Ground Connections
b SEN PWR LIT/ESD/EMI Power to Sensor
c SPWR RET LIT/ESD/EMI Power Return from Sensor

Comments:
This pin definition is identical to the Q330 ensuring compatibility with both cables and with EpiSensors and Broadband units.
This also works with the Terminal Board Option.
The power supplied to the sensor is the power input to the Digitizer and is not regulated in the Digitizer. The sensor will see power
supply variations as the unit switches from running off its AC/DC converter to battery power on loss of AC.

Page 318
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

External 4th Channel Single Input Sensor Connector

Connector: 851-0BP14-15SX54-A7, 15 Sockets, Shell 14, Blk


Mating Connector: 851-06EC14-15PX54, 15 Pins, Shell 14, Blk

Pin Name Protection Description


A CH4 + LIT/ESD/EMI Channel 4 Positive Input
B CH4 - LIT/ESD/EMI Channel 4 Negative Input
C CAL4_RTN LIT/ESD/EMI Separate Calibration Return Channel 4
D SC4 LIT/ESD/EMI Sensor Control 4 (Calibration Enable)
E OWSD4 LIT/ESD/EMI One Wire Sensor Data Channel 4
F OWSD5 LIT/ESD/EMI One Wire Sensor Data Channel 5 Terminal Board ID
G SPWR RET LIT/ESD/EMI Power Return from Sensor
H SEN4 PWR LIT/ESD/EMI Power to Sensor
J +3.3VOWS LIT/ESD/EMI One Wire Sensor Device Power
K OWSD2 LIT/ESD/EMI One Wire Sensor Data Channel 2
L CAL4 LIT/ESD/EMI Calibration Signal Channel 4
M CNTRL RTN LIT/ESD/EMI Sensor Control Return and One Wire Return (ISO AGND)
N CH4GND LIT/ESD/EMI Channel 4 Ground & Shield (ISO AGND)
P PGP LIT/ESD/EMI Case and Shield Ground
R OWSD3 LIT/ESD/EMI One Wire Sensor Data Channel 3

Comments:
This connector serves multiple purposes:
1) Interfacing to a passive seismometer - with or without calibration and 1W metadata.
2) Interfacing with a single channel active sensor with a single power supply, calibration, calibration control,
and 1W metadata.
3) Used with the three channel board to enable the 4 channel terminal block connection for the Granite for
use with uniaxial sensors.
4) Used with the other 4th Channel Boards in a 12 Channel group to connect a 4th Triaxial sensor with or
without a power adapter.
Note: The power supplied to the sensor is the power input to the Digitizer and is not regulated in the
Digitizer. The sensor will see power supply variations as the unit switches from running off its AC/DC
converter to battery power on loss of AC.

Page 319
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Four Channel Terminal Board Dual Supply (KMI 111915-01)

This board is designed to allow easy field connections of sensors requiring dual regulated +/-12V supplies.

10 Pin Connections for Dual +/-12V Sensors (-01 Version)


Pin Name Description
1 CH + Channel X Positive Input
2 CH - Channel X Negative Input
3 CHGND Channel X Ground & Shield (ISO AGND)
4 CAL Calibration Signal
5 CALEN Calibration Enable
6 AGND Connects to ADC Isolated Ground - Common
7 AGND Connects to ADC Isolated Ground - Common
8 +12VA Positive 12V Supply to Sensors
9 -12VA Negative 12V Supply to Sensors
10 PGP Case and Shield Ground

Comments:
This terminal strip is a set of four to provide connections to four uniaxial sensors per ADC/DSP
board. This board variant contains a DC to DC converter to supply power to +/-12VDC
sensors. The one-wire LAN connection is not supported in this variant. The terminal block plug
into a receptacle to allow both easy wiring and also a unit to be replaced and re-wired easily in
the field. These are Phoenix Contact 3.5mm pitch connectors. The terminal strip can also be
used with Tri-axial sensors and if three terminal boards are provided on a 12 Channel group
will allow 4 Tri-axial sensors to be connected. The board also boosts the Calibration
Enable/Undamp signal to a +12V active, -12V inactive signal compatible with older generation
FBA-11, FBA-23 units. The same signal also works on EpiSensors.

Page 320
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Four Channel Terminal Board Single Supply (KMI 111915-02)

This board is designed to allow easy field connections of sensors that can operate off a single supply that varies between
8-16VDC. The power supplied to the sensor is essentially the power supplied to the Rock Digitizer. If the Kinemetrics
power supply is used the nominal voltage will be 15.5V when AC is present and a nominal 12V from an attached valve
regulated lead acid battery (VRLA) when AC power is lost. The power has a 500mA resetting polymer fuse on the line to
limit the current drawn by the sensor. The Calibration Enable Signal is a 5V logic signal with a low of <0.4VDC and a high
of >4.4 VDC.

12 Pin Connections for Single Supply Sensors


Pin Label Description
1 CH+ Channel X Positive Input
2 CH- Channel X Negative Input
3 CGND Channel X Ground & Shield (ISO AGND)
4 CAL Calibration Signal
5 CENB Calibration Enable
6 COM Connects to ADC Isolated Ground
7 VRTN System Power Return
8 VSYS System Power to Sensor
9 VSYS System Power to Sensor
10 PGP Case and Shield Ground
11 VOW One Wire Sensor Device Power
12 DOW One Wire Sensor Data X

Comments:

This terminal strip is a set of four to provide connections to four single supply uni-axial sensors per ADC/DSP board. The
terminal block plug into a receptacle to allow both easy wiring and also a unit to be replaced and re-wired easily in the
field. These are Phoenix Contact 3.5mm pitch connectors. The terminal strip can also be used with single supply Tri-
axial sensors and if three terminal boards are provided on a 12 Channel group will allow 4 Tri-axial sensors to be
connected. This board is compatible with the ES-T, HypoSensor, and Shallow Borehole Units. Note: For ES-U, and older
ES-U2 single supply units the Rock unit should be powered with a 12V+/-5% DC supply not the standard 15.5V supply.

Page 321
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Optional RS232 Full Serial Port Connector

Connector: 851-07P12-10P54A7, 10 Pins, Shell Size 12, Blk

Mating Connector: 851-06EC12-10S54, 10 Sockets, Shell Size 12, Blk (KMI 852178)

Serial Option Connector Description

Serial Option Connector Pins

Page 322
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Serial Option DB-9 Connector Pins

Serial Option Connector Wiring Diagram

Page 323
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Optional RS232 Dual Serial Port Connector with Power

Connector: 851-07B14-19SX54A7, 19 Sockets, Shell Size 14, Blk, Rotated X

Mating Connector: 851-06EC14-19PX54, 19 Pins, Shell Size 14, Blk, Rotated X

Comments:

This pin definition supports one 9 wire RS232 and one 5 wire RS232. Each port has a switched system power line
available from the system power. A 1Hz output is provided to allow synchronization of other equipment such as
Freewave Radios.

This connector is designed for local use so only ESD/EMI protection is provided; sockets are used as power is available on
the pins. The connector is rotated as this is the same connector used in the EpiSensor.

PT Connector
J3

A BD1 PTA_DCDA
B BD2 PTB_CTSA
B A M PTC_RTSA
C BD3
D BD4 PTD_DSRA
E BD5 PTE_GndA
F BD6 PTF_DTRA
C P N L
G BD7 PTG_TxDA-
H BD8 PTH_RxDA-
J BD9 PTJ_RIA
K BD10 PTK_CTSB
D R V U K PTL_RTSB
L BD11
M BD12 PTM_GndB
N BD13 PTN_TxDB-
P BD14 PTP_RxDB-
E S T J PTR_V12ExtRtn
R BD15
S BD16 PTS_V12Ext1
T BD17 PTT_V12Ext2
U BD18 PTU_C1Hz
F G H
V BD19

Front (sockets) v iew PGP


851-07B14-19SX54-A7

Page 324
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Optional Ethernet 2 Connector

Connector: 851-07P12-8PX54-A7, 8 Pins, Shell 12, Rotated X, Blk

Mating Connector: 851-06EC12-8SX54, 8 Sockets, Shell 12, Rotated X, Blk (KMI 852175)

This pin definition supports 10-Base-T on the Mil Type connector. The pins correspond to the 8 wires in the four pair
cable. The transmission and receive pairs are on the outside these are the only connections as POE is not supported on
the WAN connection. This connector uses pins to maintain compatibility with the LAN Ethernet Connector. The Ethernet
connections are all isolated with a 1500V Transformer followed by semiconductor transient suppressors. EMI protection
is provided by high frequency ferrite beads on the connector.

Wiring colors are per EIA T568B color code.

As there is no shield on a CAT-5(e) cable there is no need for a separate PGP pin. Shielded LAN cables should terminate
on the connector in a 360 degree bond.

(Connector J1 on Ethernet Option)

Ethernet WAN Connector Description

Ethernet WAN Connector Pins

Page 325
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Ethernet Wiring
Ethernet straight through wiring conforms to the following wiring standards:

Ethernet Wiring Colors

Ethernet Cross Over Wiring


Ethernet cross over wiring conforms to the following wiring standards:

Ethernet Cross Over Cable Pinouts

NOTE: The cross over cable layout is suitable for 1000Base-T operation, all 4 pairs are crossed.

Page 326
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Cable Drawings
P/N 112297-PL, Power and Battery

Page 327
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

P/N 112250-PL, Optional Power Supply

Page 328
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

P/N 112259-PL, Optional Power Supply with Battery Connections

Page 329
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

P/N 112294-PL, Console Port

Page 330
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

P/N 112295-PL, Full Serial Port

Page 331
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

P/N 112293-PL, Standard Ethernet

Page 332
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

P/N 112075-PL, Time Over Ethernet

Page 333
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

P/N 112298-PL, Optional Serial Port

Page 334
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

P/N 111941-PL, Optional Dual Serial Port

Page 335
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

P/N 111946-PL, Optional Modem

Page 336
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

P/N 111859, External GPS Cables

Page 337
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

P/N 111853 External GPS Option

Page 338
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

Further information
The following documents may be useful in providing further information:

Rockhound User Manual Kinemetrics P/N 304702

Glossary
ADC Analog to Digital Converter. A device that digitizes an input voltage level and reports it as a single
numeric value.

DAC Digital to Analog Converter. A devices that takes a numeric value provided by a computer and
produces an output voltage level.

DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. When used, causes the device (such as a digitizer) to ask
the DHCP server for an IP address, and then use the address assigned by the server.

DSL Digital Subscriber Line. A low cost fast internet connection. Two points to be aware:

Most inexpensive DSL services use dynamic IP addressing, so the IP address is assigned by the
Internet Service Provider. One problem with this can mean that from outside you dont know
what the units address is. This can be made easier by using DSL with a static IP address, which
is more expensive.
DSL for the most part is actually ADSL, the A being asynchronous. What this means is that
downloads from the unit are slower than uploads to the unit, with uploads usually being
about 1/6th the speed of downloads. This means that the process of downloading data from the
unit will be significantly slower than the advertised speed.
DNS Domain Name Server. This facility if how internet names like www.kmi.com are translated into
the numeric address required to locate something on the internet.

DSP Digital Signal Processor. A specialized processor for performing arithmetic related to signal
processing. In the digitizer, DSPs are used for data acquisition and FIR filtering with one DSP used for
each 4 physical channels.

FTP File Transfer Protocol. A method of transferring files over the internet. Generally not considered
secure, so SCP or another secure method is preferred. FTP can be used without significant security risks
if done carefully.

ISP Internet Service Provider. A company providing internet communication services such as DSL.

JVM Java Virtual Machine. Software which is loaded onto a computer allowing it to run Java programs.

LAN Local Area Network. A network of computers or devices that is private and usually local to a
building or organization.

Page 339
ROCK DIGITIZER USER MANUAL DOCUMENT 300715, REVISION J

PC Personal Computer. In the context of this document, it refers to any computer with a browser
capable of running Java. It does not have to be an x86 running Windows.

PING A method of checking communications between two IP addresses over a network.

POC Point of Contact. A method for overcoming the problems with deploying equipment on networks
using dynamic IP addressing. When POC methods are used, the remote equipment connects periodically
to a remote POC Server at a known address, and reports its current address. In this way, the user can
connect to the remote equipment through the POC Server without having to know the current address.

SCP Secure Copy. A secure method to transfer files that uses the SSH protocol.

SOH State of Health. Keeps track of information that can be used to help diagnose system problems
such as voltages, current, temperature, humidity, etc.

SSH Secure Shell. Really an overall secure communication protocol used for terminal sessions, file
transfers, and other activities.

TELNET A simple terminal session protocol used on networks. Generally not considered secure.

TOE Time Over Ethernet. This Kinemetrics facility allows digitizers within a local network to share a
time reference over the primary Ethernet cable, which can also be used to provide data and digitizer
power.

USB Universal Serial Bus. This increasingly common interface is used for many interfaces from hard
drives through keyboards, mice, and serial port adapters.

WAN Wide Area Network. A large scale network usually employing use of the internet.

Page 340
Index

Index

Acausal Filters, 68 Decommissioning & Recycling, 275

Adding Channels, 176 Default Behavior, 286

Adding Modules, 120 Deleting a Linux directory with lots of files, 266

Advanced Operation, 190 Desiccant Replacement, 272

alarms, 59 Detailed System Overview, 280

Altus Emulation, 152 Dial On Event, 162

Altus Emulator and SDS, 266 Dialing In, 166

Anti-Alias Filtering, 68 earthquakes

Application Specific Configuration, 287 regional, 61


Editing Parameters, 116
Auto Mount, 212
Editing Parameters with RockTalk, 167
Basic Operation, 43
Ethernet Cross Over Wiring, 326
Basic Setup, 46
Ethernet LAN Connector, 311
Batch Mode, 149, 161
Ethernet WAN Connector, 325
Battery Charging, 282
Ethernet Wiring, 326
Bullet Antenna Options
External Charger, 268
Internal GPS, 24
Cables Reference, 306 FAQs, 170

Cant delete data files when logged in as, 266 File Management and Retrieval, 78

Causal Filters, 68 File Retrieval, 220

Changing Output Data Formats, 180 File Transfer, 166

Changing trigger levels, 170 File Viewer, 137

Common Linux Commands, 297 File Viewer Dynamic Operation, 141

Communication with the User Via Status LEDs, File Viewing, 80


283
FileViewer and Large Files, 266
Configuration Options, 202
FOG Antenna Options

Page 341
Index

Internal GPS, 23 Layout Wizard, 190


frequency response, 60
LEDs, 6
Front Panel, 3
Lightening Protections Devices, 315, 316
FTP Server, 250
Linux Overview, 296
Further information, 339
Linux Passwords, 219
Glossary, 339
Log files, 228
GPS
Magnetic Switch, 7, 284
Bullet Antenna Mounting, 24
FOG Antenna Mounting, 23 Maintenance & Service, 210
Lightening Protection, 315, 316
Hardware Identification, 296 minimum run time, 59

Humidity Monitoring, 284 Modem Configuration, 202

IIR-A filter, 61 Modem not Communicating, 265

Initial Setup, 43 Modem Only Operation, 163

Installation & Setup, 10 Mounting a Bullet Antenna, 24

Installing Mounting a FOG Antenna, 23

Lightening Protection Devices, 315, 316 Network Address, 43


Installing Firmware Updates, 169
Network Configuration, 214
Installing the Granite, 18
Network Parameters, 202
Interactive File Viewer Doesnt List Any Files,
Network Triggering, 188
265
Networking and Security, 209
Internal GPS
Non-Causal Filters, 68
Bullet Antenna Mounting, 24
FOG Antenna Mounting, 23
Non-networked Use, 150
Internet Explorer 7 and FTP, 265
Online Documentation, 84
IO Bits, 203
Operating Environment, 13
IP issues. Firewalls and router blocks, 267
Optional Interfaces, 7, 8
IP Services, 213
Optional RS232 Full Serial Port Connector, 322
Java, 236
Optional Secure Digital, 269
Keeping Time, 208

Page 342
Index

Other Channel Parameters, 53 Replacing Batteries, 273

Other Parameters, 57 Replacing Compact Flash Cards and SD Cards,


274
Overview of the Web Interface, 90
Replacing Modules, 129
P and S waves, 58
Requirements for Installation, 14
Parameter Download, 167
Reversed Input and Overvoltage Protection, 282
Parameter Upload, 168
Rockhound Command Console, 143
parameters
RockTalk, 256
alarm threshold, 59
voting, 66 Run Remote Check Tests, 271
Parametric Operation Protection, 285
Safety, xii
Passwords, 57
Save Parameters, 58
Physical vs. Virtual Channels, 53
Saving and Restoring Parameters, 221
Point of Contact, 205
Seal Screw, 7
Ports, 267
Secondary Compact Flash, 270
post event time, 58
Sensitivity, 50
Power Connector, 306
Sensor Groups, 47
Power Fail Protection, 286
Sequenced Shut Down, 283
Powering Down the System, 210
Sequenced Start Up, 282
Powering Up the System, 210
Serial, USB, Console Connector, 308
Practice Assembly, 16
Software Installation, 211
pre-event time, 58
Software Tools, 304
Primary Compact Flash, 269
Software Updates, 224
Private Networks, 265
Software Versions, 302
PuTTY, 241
Software Watchdog, 217
Remote Connections, 86
STA/LTA
Removable Media, 212
adjusting trigger parameters, 62, 64
Removing Modules, 125 algorithm, 62
de-trigger threshold, 65
Page 343
Index

long-time duration, 64 trigger, 62


ratio, 65
short-time average/long-term average, 62 algorithm, 62
short-time duration, 64 de-trigger threshold, 59
threshold trigger, 65 filters, 60
Standard Interfaces, 4 threshold, 59
threshold level, 62
State of Health, 230 types and sampling rates, 61
Trigger Levels, 55
State-of-Health Streams, 54
Triggered Recording, 58
Storage, 269
triggering
Storage Module, 270
channel, 59
Streaming, 162 STA/LTA, 62
strong motion, 59
Supercapacitor Backup, 281 weak motion, 60
Troubleshooting, 265
Switching Between Layouts, 179
Troubleshooting & Service, 272
System Overview, 2
Unpacking & Inspecting the Unit, 14
System Watchdog, 286
Updating Linux, 301
Table of Contents, i
Updating the Power Supply, 289
Telemetry Options, 189
Using Different Triggers or Trigger Filters, 171
Telnet Client, 236
Viewing System Information, 44
Temperature Monitoring, 284
Voltage Ranges, 48
Terminal mode, 153
votes, voting schemes, 67
Terminal Program, 236
Warranties, Disclaimers & Trademarks, i
The TTYMonitor, 163
Waveform Viewer Stops Updating, 266
The VI Editor, 300
Waveform Viewing, 82
The Web Interface, 46
Weather-Proofing, 315
Time Over Ethernet (TOE), 72
Web Browser, 235
Timed Operation Windows, 285
Web Interface Advanced Features, 134
Timed Recording, 185
Web Servers Layout Wizard Doesnt Transmit
Tools, 235 Files, 265

Page 344
Index

What is dig1?, 170 WinSCP, 237

What is Rockhound?, 2

Page 345

You might also like